EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide
Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C DPDS3-PB-200005D DPDS3-PB-200005E Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2 PDS 7.3 PDS 8.0 SE Date February 2003 February 2003 October 2004 November 2005 Pages 1-594 595-643 644-679 Cover/Notice

Copyright
Copyright © 1984-2005 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.2277013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

_ _______________
cond_part .............................................................................................................................. cond_spec ............................................................................................................................. drawing ................................................................................................................................. drawing_type ........................................................................................................................ drop_point ............................................................................................................................. duct_spec .............................................................................................................................. ee_cond_x_area .................................................................................................................... ee_graphic_only .................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_code ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_color ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_config ...................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_insul ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_size .......................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_volt .......................................................................................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ................................................................................................................... ee_system .............................................................................................................................. ee_units ................................................................................................................................. ee_unique .............................................................................................................................. ee_yes_no ............................................................................................................................. envelope ................................................................................................................................ light_fixture .......................................................................................................................... manual_part .......................................................................................................................... mscatalog .............................................................................................................................. mscodelist ............................................................................................................................. mscolumns ............................................................................................................................ ol_type .................................................................................................................................. one_line ................................................................................................................................. panel ...................................................................................................................................... project ................................................................................................................................... pullbox .................................................................................................................................. rcp ......................................................................................................................................... rcp_type ................................................................................................................................ tl_fit_env ............................................................................................................................... tl_qual ................................................................................................................................... tl_subtype .............................................................................................................................. tl_type ................................................................................................................................... to_equip ................................................................................................................................ to_support ............................................................................................................................. tray_part ................................................................................................................................ tray_spec ............................................................................................................................... vendor ................................................................................................................................... wway_part ............................................................................................................................. wway_spec ............................................................................................................................ EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description .................................................................... cabsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... cndsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... drawing ................................................................................................................................. drop_point .............................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491

13

......................................dat ...........................................................dat .................................................................................................. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation .................................................................................................................. EE Nucleus File Structure ...................................................................................... Available Fittings ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... sys_to_drw ....._ _______________ duct_fill ...... process................................................................................................................................... Update Reference Schema ...................................... rcp_to_drw ........................................... EE Raceway File Structure ........................... ol_to_sys ......................................................................... project ........................................ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... manager... 14 .................................................................. str_to_sys ..................................................................................................................................................... rcp .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... fitting ........ ee_system ............................................................................................................................ one_line ......................................dat .........dat .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. mscolumns ...................................................................... Appendix F: EE File Structure .......................................................................................................................... panel .................................................................................. eden............................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ................................ report................................................................................................................... to_support ...................................................................................... fit_to_sys .............................................................................................................................................. envelope ....................................................... 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications ..............................................unl Files .......................................................................... print................................................. rcp_to_sys ......................................................................................................................................................... Symbol Processor File ............................... straight .................................................................... Sample ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ rule_chk. mscatalog ................................................................. panel_to_drw ..................dat ........ Appendix D: Specification ........................................................................................dat ............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................ Information Output: ............................................................................................. RIS Report Processing ............................................................................................................... Alter Table Form ........................................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files .........................................cmd file ................................................................................................... 15 ........... Information Output: ........................................................................................................................................................................... Project Drawing List (drwlst) ......................................................................................... Associated Software/Files .................................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) ........................................................................................................... Set Form ........... Associated Software/Files ................................... Appendix I: rway....................................................................................................................................... Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager ............... Associated Software/Files ...................................... Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) .....................cmd ............................................................................................._ _______________ Appendix H: alias........................................ Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) ........ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) .............................................................................. Table Information Form ....... Information Output: ................... Alter Schema Form .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Schema File Form ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Data Definition Form ................................................................................ Drop Table Form ............................................................................................................................................................................... Create Schema Form ................................ Create Table Form ............................................................................................................................................ Information Output: ....................................................................... Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) ......................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files ............................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Appendix J: Reports ............................................................................................. Drop Schema Form ................................. Information Output: ...................................................................................................................................................... Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form ...........................................................................................................

..... 16 ............................................................................_ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ............................................................................................................................................................................. Database Edit Functions ......................................................... Glossary ...... 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix ............................................................................................................. Index .................................................................................................... EE Manager ................................... Appendix N: EE Configure .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

convenient. please call your local Intergraph office. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process.intergraph. Our web address is: http://www. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.com.intergraph.com.A. and direction. please call your local Intergraph office._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products.com/ppo/services/support.S. services. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph. If you are outside of the United States.S.asp. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. 17 .S.com. If you are outside the United States. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U.intergraph. Alabama 35758 U.

AL 35758 18 . You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process. Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed._ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. let us know.

Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. grouped according to function._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. and an index. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. a glossary. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. Oracle. and Ingres. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway. modify. 19 . This document is designed as a reference. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. appendices. these include Informix. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. such as vi or EMACS. Also. numbered sections. you should be familiar with a text editor. Currently.

Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. menus. forms. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. For international locations. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. Provides installation instructions. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release. and on-line Help. Provides special notices to the customer. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative. This includes information on the screen display. File Name readme. Describes the graphics environment for the product. Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. Describe the product environment. For a fixes release. 20 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example. For example. The ASCII report is stored in the layout. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words. For example. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. phrases. or groups of related information. 21 .dat to load the ASCII file. For example. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. The text is placed in the viewing plane. or dialog box title. For example. parameter name. Bold Indicates a command name. Choose File > Open to load a new file. which requires an action be taken by the user. Key in original.rpt file. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response.

k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z.February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. then K. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed. Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. To press the Escape key. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. Need a hint — used with activities and labs. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. 22 . which map menu selections to key combinations. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises.

Select the line string to define the graphic template. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.dat to load it into the new surface. right-button chord. For example.dat from the list box. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . Click Apply to save the changes. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. In addition. For example. For example. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. Double-click on the file original. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. Select the file original. To key a character string into a text box. you click the action you want to affect the item. you would select items to define parameters. For example. Selecting does not initiate an action. In a dialog box. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. After selecting an item._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. such as selecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file.

February 2003 24 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. 25 . the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. modify._ _______________ 1. Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment. Introduction 1. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 .February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product.

The software covered includes baseline and application software. Oracle. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information._ _______________ 2. or Notepad. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. or Ingres. such as vi. all projects have been archived. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. EMACS. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. On-line Informix. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. and EE Raceway Modeling. If you are updating. 2. You must be familiar with a text editor.

— Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server. followed by the EE application products. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. and the server-client workstation. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or remotely on a server. First. Based on these two setups. The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. the workstation as server. A database can reside locally on each workstation.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. you should load system nucleus software. 28 . For the purposes of this installation. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. Additionally. it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important.

follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system. This form expects your user name._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. or it may be on your local system. 29 . Double-click on setup. 1. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. This will invoke the product selection form. Once you know what application software you need. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. 2. 4. and serial number (as delivered). Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. First. Installation Procedure 2. based on your system configuration. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly. company.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. This may be a networked drive. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. including a valid serial number. Download/Install 3.

you must provide the installation path. or server). Among other installation options that vary according to product. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software. If server is selected. If local is selected.February 2003 5. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. 30 . This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader.) If client is selected. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local. A message box will appear. and a local path to the icon associated with the software. select OK. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session.) When all information has been provided. client. select Load Components. as well as path to the software on the server. When all software to be loaded has been selected. Place an X next to the software you wish to install.

the EENUC (Common) program group will be created. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. and not to a previously-selected file. you must set the environment variables in your ee.) 7. EE Readme. EE Help. Before you can enter the EE environment.txt._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. When the software has successfully loaded. you will modify this copied file. 2. 6.cfg file. Copy the ee. Download/Install 8.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. (Your login directory will be fine. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 . Before executing the software. EE Configure. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. otherwise select No. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. This program group contains the EE Manager. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded. 9.cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. and EE Nucleus icons. Set your user environment variables. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software.

then select Set. and no more changes are needed. This will close the EE Configure utility. select OK to save the modifications to the ee. To modify the value of that variable._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cfg file. key the desired value into the Value field. After all variables have been set properly for your environment. This displays the current value and description for that variable. 32 .February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set.

See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. Also. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. Also. and 202 for reference schema. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide. Create empty RIS schemas. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. 2.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode. 1. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. 3. Download/Install 33 . What follows is a very basic outline. Select and install the RDBMS you will use._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. Databases 2. 4. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. — Decide where on the system to locate your databases.

February 2003 5. Update your project and reference schemas. The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this. — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide. 34 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions. When you key in EE. To enter the Electrical Engineer form. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form. All EE drawings are organized by project. 35 . the Project Menu displays: 3. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create._ _______________ 3.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and then to select. use standard EMACS commands. If you do not know the appropriate addresses. or key in.control the EE form.a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. Message Area .for keying in or displaying data about a project. The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list. 36 .displays messages from the software. To turn off an active option. These options can display additional forms or menus. check with your system manager.lists available project and design files Input/Output Area . Listing Area . To edit information you key in to input fields. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes. the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area. select another option. Options List .February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons .

you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. and then select Confirm (√). EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form. The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. 37 . If the bar fills the space above the arrows. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. all of the available listings are currently displayed. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. provide the necessary input. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. For example. When a particular option is active. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. When listings fill more than one page. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. 3. and executes the active process._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option.

Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager. Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation. Delete — Deletes EE project files.February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. if there are more than one. 38 .

Steps 1. 39 . A . 3. Multiple files can exist within a single project. EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. Select the Project name field. and key in the new project name. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase. Select Confirm (√) to create the project. page 553 . see RIS Schema Manager. Create 3. For information about creating a project schema. Select Create from the Project Menu option list. which itself can span multiple products. so you are not required to key in this extension. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. 2. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project.prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). The Project name field displays below the scrolling area.

Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. if one has been defined. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. and the schema passwords. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. You will need to input the names of the project. the project and reference schemas. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. You may also key project names into this field. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment. if they exist. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. 40 .

If only one EE product exists on your workstation. The project listing displays. Select a project from the listing area. and key in the password. if needed. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. The EE Product Menu displays. EE Environment 41 . 3. For information about schema passwords. see RIS Schema Manager. You can make modifications to these fields. Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields. 2. 4. — OR — Select the Project name field. and key in a project name. page 553 . The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically._ _______________ Steps 1. Select Confirm (√). Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. leave these fields blank. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. If no password was defined for the schemas. 3.

only the EE Raceway product is on menu. Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. The Design Menu displays. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. available for use.February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation.) 42 . Steps 1. then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu. In this example.

EE Environment Steps 1. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field. 4. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. and key in the new project name. Select the Copy project to input field. 43 ._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. and key in a project to be copied. 2. 3. Select a project to be copied from the listing area. 3.

If a database exists in the project directory. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. Select the project name from the listing area. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted. 44 . — OR — Select the Project name field. 2. Steps 1. a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and key in the project name. Select Confirm (√).February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. 3.

— OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process. a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. If a database does not exist in the project directory. For information about dropping a schema. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. page 553 . see RIS Schema Manager. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. 45 . 3. EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project.

Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The path must exist on the remote node. The project name is appended to this path. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project. A password is required if you are using the TCP option.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk. Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. 46 . Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node.

you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. Archive 3. EE_USERNAME. — OR — Select the Project name field. Select the storage facility for your project files. 4. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s . 3. Select the Project name from the scrolling area.EErc file. user name. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. contact your system administrator. and key in a project name. 2. EE Environment 47 .) When archiving using a floppy disk. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. (If you need more information about the . Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information._ _______________ Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving.EErc file. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Default values for the remote node name. and EE_REMDIR.

A password is required if you use the TCP option. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area. When restoring from a floppy. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin. 48 . Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name. When restoring from a network.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area.

Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. Indicate the storage location for your project. Select Restore from the Project Menu. 2. Restore 3. 4. and key in a project name. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. you must have the disk in the disk drive. Select the Project name field. When restoring from a floppy disk. 3. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle._ _______________ Steps 1. EE Environment 49 .

RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes. The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections.

With this utility you can create. you must have an existing database and user name. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. 51 . To access the RIS Schema Manager form. RIS schema utilities 3. see RIS Schema Manager. drop. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. For more information. page 553 . select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation. Steps 1. RIS Schema Manager. and maintain project and reference database schemas._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. 2. Before using this utility.

To enter the password. Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. set the toggle to Echo. page 425 .February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. For additional information about updating schemas. select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema. see EE Databases. 52 . To enter the schema name. Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. though doing so will slow processing time. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. You can update the schema with multiple products. Schema password — Defines the schema password. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. if one exists. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To display the schema password input.

. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. and key in the full pathname for those files. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. see Process.. and key in the desired filenames. EE Environment 1.EErc file. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. Background. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . Return to step 1. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. 4. 53 .EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. page 64 . or Batch.EErc file. The Update project schema form displays: 2. 3. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data.msg). Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. The update process displays the message Processing . For more information about operating modes. Set up the form to meet your specifications._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. To change the displayed default files. Update Project Schema Steps 3. select the field. When Update project schema finishes processing.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 5. page 89 . You can also access these message files. see Output. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. the system displays an error message file (create_db. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. For more information. using the Output option on the Utilities form. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form.February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. 54 .err). 6.

For additional information about updating schemas. page 425 . You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. EE Environment 55 . select the field._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. see Process. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password.EErc file.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. see EE Databases. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. To change the displayed default files. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. if one exists. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. You can update the schema with multiple products. set the toggle to Echo. To enter information. and key in the full pathname for those files. and key in the desired filenames. Background. 3. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data.EErc file. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. though doing so will slow processing time. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). select the field. To enter information. Schema password — Define the schema password. select the field. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. page 64 . You can redefine the defaults by editing this . Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. For more information about operating modes. or Batch. To display the schema password input.

. 3. 2. Return to step 1. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. it will display one of two message files.February 2003 Steps 1. Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form. The update process displays the message Processing . — If the schema is updated without errors._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4.err). — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema. 56 . the system displays an error message file (create_db. When Update reference schema finishes processing. The Update reference schema form displays. Set up the form to meet your specifications. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters.msg)..

see Output. 3. using the Output option on the Utilities form. EE Environment 57 ._ _______________ Update Reference Schema You can also access these message files. 6. For more information. page 89 . Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. 5. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. located in the current project’s /tmp directory.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 58 .

Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu. Create — Allows you to create a design file. you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options. 4. if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu. If you are a new user. 59 . EERWAY Environment The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu._ _______________ 4. page 42 for more information). — OR — Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment The EE Raceway Design Menu. Commands The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected.

EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. and message files. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes. 60 . report. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database.February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. rule._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design.

optionally. Select Create from the Design Menu. you are actually copying a seed file (a template). 61 .dgn) and English seed file (seed. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos._ _______________ Create This option creates design files. If there is only one seed file. 3. 2. By default. The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. the listing area displays all these files. EERWAY Environment Steps 1. based on a specified seed file.dgn). it is displayed as the default. Select the seed file. 4. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and. Create When you create a drawing. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed. a file extension. You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. If there is more than one seed file available. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area.

The drawing is added to the active project. 62 . 4.dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension.February 2003 A file extension of . The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing. Select Confirm (√). — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

EERWAY Environment 63 . Select Confirm (√). Select Design from the Design Menu. Design Steps 1. 4. 3. 2. Select the drawing name from the listing area. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process. The system invokes the graphics environment._ _______________ Design This option accesses the graphics environment. taking you into a specified existing design file.

Overview This section provides general information about running all processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat file in win32app\eerway\data. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process. See Raceway Processes.February 2003 Process This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. 64 . These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. page 331 for more information about individual processes.

An asterisk (*). select Confirm (√) to execute the process. EERWAY Environment 65 . A process in Background runs immediately. After providing this information. You can override default values by keying in your own information. is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. an input screen displays. if you enter a*. Once you have entered all necessary information. 4. all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. you regain control immediately. but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. In other words. and you regain control immediately. Process You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. and you do not regain control until the process is finished. you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. Operating Modes The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. A process in Foreground runs immediately. The default mode is Foreground._ _______________ When you enter a specific process. For example.

MIDNIGHT. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. NOW and NEXT. 66 . Select a process from the listing area._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. 3. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. The time can be entered as 1. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. The system also recognizes the names NOON. Select Process from the Design Menu. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday Steps 1. the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). If you input no date.February 2003 Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select Batch mode. Optionally. four digits to be hours and minutes. 2 or 4 digits. an input box displays. One. otherwise. you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). The suffix AM or PM may be appended.

For detailed information about individual Eden options. see Eden Processes. and special parts._ _______________ EDEN The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway.dat file. page 347 . EDEN Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights. This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. EERWAY Environment 67 . 4. fittings. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden.

you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. After providing this information. Operating Modes A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. Once you have entered all necessary information. select Confirm (√) to begin the option process. The default mode is foreground. and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. you regain control immediately. An option in background mode runs immediately.February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)). and you regain control immediately. An option in foreground mode runs immediately. background. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. and key in your own information. In other words. You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. an input screen displays. you can override the default values that already display._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 68 . These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground. and batch. If necessary. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections.

You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). The suffix AM or PM may be appended. NOW and NEXT are also recognized. four digits to be hours and minutes. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. an input box displays. 2 or 4 digits._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. otherwise. The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. MIDNIGHT. EERWAY Environment 69 . allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. it will run the job TODAY. it will run the job TOMORROW. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4. If you input no date. One. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. The special names NOON.

The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. You must load the project database before running any reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases.February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports. See Reports.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 70 .

Select Report from the Design Menu. you should name the output files yourself. Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option. You can change the name of the output file or error file. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. EERWAY Environment 71 . To change the output filename. an input screen displays. select the output file box and key in a new name. 4. 2._ _______________ When you process a report. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. Select a report from the listing area. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. 3. the new file will overwrite that file.

The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 72 . 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form.February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. For instance.

The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. For more detailed information about each rule check._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks. 4. EERWAY Environment 73 . You must load the project database before running any rule checks. page 545 . see Reports. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks.dat file in win32app\eerway\data.

Accept the default information that displays in the input fields._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 When you process a rule check. 74 . The name of the rule check report displays at the top. Steps 1. Select Rule from the Design Menu. 2. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. or change that information according to your specifications. If you want to save reports throughout a project. you should name the output files yourself. an input screen displays. Select a rule check report from the listing area. 3. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. the new file will destroy the previously created file. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously.

All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. 75 . the Drawing Utility Menu displays. 4._ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. Each column will list a different subdirectory. When you select Utilities from the Design Menu. EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns.

Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging).rpt) .All files output by Raceway processes. Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. Select Utilities from the Design Menu. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (.All report files generated by standard reports. 76 . Enter necessary form information for the active option. and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. Rename — Renames a file. Send — Sends a file to a network node.dgn) .All drawings. Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. 2. (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (.chk) .tmp) . Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). screen. and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option.February 2003 Drawing (. Output — Outputs a file to a printer. 3. Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. Steps 1. Receive — Receives a file from a network node. Copy — Copies a file.All report files generated by rule checks reports. or plotter. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk.

EERWAY Environment 77 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option._ _______________ 4. Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option. Utilities 4.

February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file.dgn. and so forth) to the new file. Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (. or key in the name of the file to be copied. elect a file from the list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . key in a unique destination file name into this field.rpt. Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied. 78 . Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called. . You must specify a unique filename for the destination file.

To physically remove the file from the workstation._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. you must select the Purge option. Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space. but can be undeleted (that is. EERWAY Environment 79 . 4. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 80 .February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete. Once you have removed files using Purge. you cannot undelete them with this option.

To de-select a selected file. Once you Purge a file. place a data point on it. 4. EERWAY Environment 81 . When the toggle is set to Select files to purge. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. selected files that have been deleted. you cannot recover it. Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. or no files at all.

and so forth) to the new filename. 82 . It does not automatically append a file extension (. Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file. You can select the file from the list.dgn. Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename.February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file.rpt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or key the name into this field. .

4. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file. You can either select the desired file from the list. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. the setting should be No IGDS. EERWAY Environment 83 . depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. Otherwise. turn on the IGDS toggle. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines.dgn)._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node. Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent. or key in the appropriate name. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. test1.

The password may or may not be visible in the field. You can either select the desired file from the list. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file. 84 . including its extension. specify the local path to the file. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received. or key in the appropriate name. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. Also. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file. Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Be sure to specify the complete filename.

EERWAY Environment 85 . Receive 4. rpt._ _______________ Local path (dgn. chk. tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received.

Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. page 46 . Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. see the description of Archive in Archive. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. 86 .

This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring. 87 . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored. Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Restore Field Descriptions 4. page 48 . For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. see the description of Restore in Restore. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk.

The password may or may not be visible in the field. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. 88 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine.

or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. or laser printer. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. Field Descriptions 4. plotter. NQS options. 89 . If you do not specify an output destination. IPLOT commands. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. Local commands._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. or select it from the list. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. screen. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer. for example – are not allowed.dat) controls the available output options.

February 2003 90 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

EERWAY Graphics 91 . By default._ _______________ 5. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document. the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. data button <D>. If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. 5. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file.

page 63 ). Initializes RIS with the reference schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views.February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen. 92 .

release the data button.displays a list of window actions. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window. your screen display may be different. Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below. 93 . (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway. MicroStation Command Window . EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button . as described in the previous section.contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5.) 1.cmds file. To select an action. When the correct item highlights. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list.

Working Area . — System Prompt Field ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Command Menu Bar . 3. 4.provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design.February 2003 — Sink Box . Windows .moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type.displays a system prompt that directs you through a command.displays the name of the current active command.displays elements as you place them. 94 . — Key-In Field . — Command Status Field . All your design work occurs in the screen working area.displays startup file information and product name. 2. Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes.contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment.displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard. The number and name of each view appears in the window title area. — Current Command Field .

Minimize .moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy. Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. Resize Borders .deletes a window. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. When the correct item highlights.restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location. Horizontal Arrows .appear when the cursor is placed over the window border. Screen Display 5. Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor. Maximize Button . If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size. To select an action from the menu.moves a window around the workspace._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . Size . the window is restored to its previous size and location.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer. Diagonal Arrows . Restore . release the data button. Maximize . Press and hold the data button to move the window. Window Menu Button .displays a list of window actions.collapses a window. If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size.provide ways to manipulate windows. Close .collapses a window. EERWAY Graphics 95 .appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border. Double-clicking on this button deletes the window. Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner. Vertical Arrows . Move Arrows . Lower .provide ways to move and resize windows. Minimize Button . Move .enlarges a window to its maximum size.appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners. the window is restored to its previous size and location.enlarges a window to its maximum size.appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border.

place the cursor over the button and press <D>. you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus.Executes the File Design command. For instance. which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window. Exit . Bar Commands . Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword. Remove Palettes .Invokes the Bar Commands palette. Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks.Removes all palettes that have been invoked. To select a keyword. Compress Design .Invokes the EERWAY command palette. and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface. when applicable. selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu. 96 .Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command. Integrated Commands . Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu.Invokes the Integrated Commands menu. which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands.

Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 97 . Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. 5.

then selecting Palette. 98 . This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. EERWAY Graphics 99 ._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. 5.

then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify Group Commands. then selecting Palette. 100 .

_ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. 5. then selecting Palette. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 101 .

102 . Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette. then selecting Palette.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window.

Identifying Elements 5. The system then highlights another element. EERWAY Graphics 103 . For example. or shape you place is called an element. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. When you are moving an element. To identify an element. press <R> to reject that element. If the correct element highlights. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. the wrong element may highlight. line. If the wrong element highlights. In many commands. The system highlights the element. you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations. press <D> again to accept the element. place a data point on it.

we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries. The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. are established based on the project type (metric or English). You may set your working units to any desired value. and Positional Units. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. you are not limited to using only them. also known as MU:SU:PU.) 104 . Therefore. called MU:SU:PU. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. 1 foot) SU — Subunit. If using this cell library. you can often use data points. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. if a user-created cell library is being used. Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins. MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example. the working units of measurement. Subunits. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design.

as described below: DI=(distance. 105 . if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed. There are several ways to key in precision points. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. 5. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. The new point is placed relative to the previous point.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :.1:6. direction) To place a precision point. For example. For example. key in DX=1:6._ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point. key in DI=0:10.0. key in its absolute x and y coordinates. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 106 .

Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6._ _______________ 6. Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information. as an operator would typically use it. This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. creating a raceway model. page 415 . this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible. and running reports and processes on the file. 107 . This includes setting up the design file. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software.

February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 . EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways. Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). The figure below displays one-line elements on the left. you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described. it is important to describe basic raceway concepts. On the right are the same elements after propagation. In general. This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process.

specifications. Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. 109 . using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command). Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. For additional system manager information. and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. for example). see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions.

You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. page 258 for more information. you can change the default symbology settings for them. If you need systems not available to you. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. See Symbology Control. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. You can change the active system throughout the design session. See Define System. You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. See Define One-Line Type. Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. See Set Active One-Line Type. See Set Active System. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. 110 . The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. Then. page 264 for more information. If you need one-line types that are not available to you. page 262 for more information. page 294 for more information. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. See Set Symbology Control. page 295 for more information. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. Then.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. page 260 for more information. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways.

See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. 111 . See Propagation Setup. and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. you should review the active propagation parameters. page 297 for more information. page 289 for more information. what one-lines will be propagated. As you place one-line segments. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command.

page 147 . The following figure displays the parts of a run.February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. If not accepted. initially in phantom mode. To draw a raceway. and Precision Input Form. placing tentative segments. using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. page 119 for more information on these commands. page 132 . Place Manual Fitting. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. you can continue placing one-lines. it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it). See Design Commands. Once you place and accept a run. 112 . and the Precision Input form. a phantom run disappears. page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. When you accept the run. until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. regardless of type. See Place One-Line. A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification.

Second. Once found. or fitting-to-fitting placement. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. For example. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. unusual angles. Eden: In Eden mode._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. 113 . pullboxes. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. If you require mitred elbows for production. you can define the fitting through Eden. so reference database access is not required. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. see Place Manual Fitting. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. page 147 for more information. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. Sketch: In sketch mode. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. Propagation 6. EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. page 194 for more information. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. For example. All special fittings (conduit bodies. First. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. For example. The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. use the Propagate command. see Propagate Element. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch. extension. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. for example).

114 . the one-line elements remain in the design file. This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. see Highlight Propagation Errors. definition. page 377 . see Error Messages. To highlight errors that occur during propagation. You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63. Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. regardless of the active propagation mode. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode). the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. and specification. thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. the propagation mode must be set to sketch. For a detailed description of these error messages. page 314 .February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols.

three-lines. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. For title blocks. one-lines. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. For the purposes of this discussion. Databases 6. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. The default annotation information. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. and title blocks. one-lines. The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. (The system manager may customize these values. 115 . supplied by the reference database. can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing. three-lines. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element. three-lines. the default can be unique for each title block cell. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database. page 178 )._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. using the annotation forms. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. and title blocks.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. one-lines.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. The project database is normally created when the project is created. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. Once the project database is loaded. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs.

A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database.February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines. and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database. a distinction is now made between schema and database. three-lines. etc.) are stored. 116 .

see Reports. page 545 . 117 ._ _______________ Reports Reports 6. You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. page 59 for general information about running reports. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. Workflow Currently. there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. For more detailed information about the individual reports. These reports run on the project and reference databases.

the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task. This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). However._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Create Interference Envelope (default name).February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software. You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection. page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process. 118 .

When you select a command from the menu. Specify an absolute coordinate to move. For each command. Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. See System/Application Manager Information. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt. Precision Input Form 7. the form displays the active command name as its title._ _______________ 7. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. Since you will use the form with a number of commands. 119 . a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway.

and prompts the system to continue to the next step. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. It also accepts any information you have entered through the form. while collapsing the precision input form. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. 120 . Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt. Cancel Terminates the active command. The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. select the field. In most cases. It can also reset a current command action by one step. To change the displayed working view. In most cases. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>.

Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. by selecting North and keying in 20. The top field displays the active system and one-line type._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. by selecting North and keying in 20. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. and direction. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. Both options accept key-in for distance. The bottom field displays various precision input messages. The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. Using Move. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. 7. Using Move To. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. For example. For example. 121 . you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point.

By using the justification point and the height and width option described below. and lower right.February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic. Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement. Three justification points are available: lower left. you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below. lower center._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 122 .

In Construct Point mode. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. you can route segments nonorthogonally. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. When you select the command. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. Activate the Any Point option. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point. The command highlights the identified segment. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. 3. 7._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. 2. If you do select Accept. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. Precision Input 123 . Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. When you identify a one-line. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints.

the command still calculates the point from the endpoint._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. 124 . The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. 5. — OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2. — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint. and select Accept.February 2003 4. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter. moving in the direction of the segment.

_ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. When you select the Height or Width buttons. Precision Input 125 . Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Using the toggle. the Full/Half toggle displays. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form. you must key in a value by which to extend the run. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. When you select the Height or Width buttons. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification). or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. 7. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. or any distance you key in. Using the toggle. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. When you select the Distance button. When you select the command. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. the Full/Half toggle displays. You cannot use this command to place a first point. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. When you select the Distance button. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type.

Steps 1. Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form.The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. Move . 2.These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined. 3. You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles. The Distance and Direction form displays. Move to .Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees. Negative values are acceptable. The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form. 126 .These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Angles . Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance . You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point.February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex.

modify. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. This option is set in the PDS product._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. 4. The default setting is clockwise. 7. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form. If counterclockwise. 127 . page 287 for more information on the available commands. See Runtime Setup Commands. If clockwise. the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees).

February 2003 128 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. manual fittings. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. raceway connect points (RCPs). You can also use these commands to enter an active point. Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. circle._ _______________ 8. change the active design parameters. Design 129 . rotate cross sections. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. drop points. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. 8. and size conduit and duct banks. and right cylinder.

Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 130 . Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank. Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer.February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill. Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment.

Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. 8. Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. See Setup Commands. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. page 119 . page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. Likewise. 131 . Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file.

These two segments will retain the systems. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point. Any one-line segment you are placing in space. or when you place a fitting. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. 132 . then connect will not be an option. Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. is new. unattached to another element. and so forth). Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. one-line type.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. based on every possible combination of routing options. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue. one-line type. or specifications of a one-line. Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. you can attach to an existing RCP. One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. you will have at least one of five possible routing options._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. raceway parameters. you can resume routing an existing one-line. you can connect to an existing one-line. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. conduit. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. and annotation of the original one-line. One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray.

or continue. 8. You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. then the command places a new RCP by default. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. If the beginning or termination action is break. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. though it is not a recommended practice. then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. If the beginning or termination action is break. attach. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. the command will not allow the continue option. or continue. attach. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. Design 133 .

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. In addition._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Data Point Accepts. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. page 256 ). prompting you to Enter first data point. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. 2. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. page 287 . Complete the routing. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. you can locate elements. page 119. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. accept input. The Place One-Line precision input form displays. 3. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. Select the Place One-Line command. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. Steps 1. 134 . and return to step 2. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. 4. Using the form.

reset a command action. If the RCP has a fitting on it. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. such as an elbow. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. you can locate elements. or part of a cell. accept input. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. circle. reject input. 135 . circle. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. 8. and exit a command. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. The arc. see Precision Input Form. If the RCP does not have a fitting. or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. route one-lines.

— OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. the route can be placed to the vessel._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. 2. 136 . You cannot key in a negative value.February 2003 Steps 1. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. 3. 4. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. circle. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. Select the Route Around Vessel command. the closest. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. The precision input form displays. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. 5.

_ _______________ 6. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel. Design 137 . Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel. 7. Route Around Vessel 8.

The system highlights a valid one-line. accept input. reset a command action.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). For detailed information about precision input. reject input. 138 . page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Insert RCP precision input form displays. the system displays the message Element not found._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. 2. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. you can locate elements. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu.

Design 139 . Insert RCP 8._ _______________ 3. — OR — If you reject the one-line. Go to Step 2. — OR — Exit the command. If you accept the one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. the system prompts you to identify another. 4. Go to Step 2. the command inserts the RCP as specified. Continue inserting RCPs.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. page 119. 2. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. accept input. For detailed information about precision input. Steps 1. reject input. For duct bank cross sections. Using the form. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. Select the Rotate Cross Section command. go to step 4. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. If you identified a duct bank cross section. 140 . but changes the duct bank justification location. page 256 for more information. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. see Set Raceway Defaults. you can locate elements. Otherwise continue to step 3.

Repeat this step. See Set Raceway Defaults. the system displays the message Element not found. 4. the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. Design 141 . Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. If Automatic Propagation is on. 3. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. 8. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. Data Point Accepts.

see Precision Input Form. For example. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. reset a command action. accept input. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit. the system displays the message Element not found. Using the form. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. You can. The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. reject input. 142 . for instance. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. 2. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. Steps 1. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. Select the Place Drop Point command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. route one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. a higher number indicates a lesser priority. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. The system highlights a valid RCP.

Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line._ _______________ 3. The system prompts you to identify another RCP. Place Drop Point 8. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP. Go to step 2. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. 4. 5. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. The system highlights the identified one-line. Go to step 2. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. The system places the drop point as specified. Go to step 4. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. and returns you to the previous prompt. Design 143 . — OR — Reject the one-line.

An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design. reset a command action. page 119. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. and exit a command. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. the system displays the message Element not found. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. route one-lines. reject input. 2. accept input. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. 144 . The system highlights a valid RCP. 3. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Steps 1. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP.

Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. 2. and exits the command. For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. Design 1. The command makes the specified data point the active point. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Define Active Point command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. 145 . page 119. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. route one-lines. and exit a command. reset a command action. Steps 8. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. one-line type. 2. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. route one-lines. Select the Set Active Parameters command. accept input. 146 . At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. Steps 1. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. The command exits automatically. Return to step 2. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Precision Input Form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. system. The system highlights the identified element. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. The system sets the active one-line type. and raceway parameters. page 119. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. 3. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. active systems. reset a command action.

the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. pullboxes. and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. During placement. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. vertical tees. For example. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces._ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. Place Manual Fitting 8. and so forth) using this command. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. then the system places the new fitting by itself. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. unusual angles. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. Design 147 . Otherwise. or fitting-to-fitting placement. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP. When placing a straight section. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section.

wye. inside vertical. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. To change the displayed qualifier. To change the displayed three-line type.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. etc. See Set Active Parameters.) for that specification. If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. page 294 . Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form. straight. 148 . the previous orientation will be retained. page 146 . the command derives the orientation from the place point. one-line type. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. and active one-line type parameters in the design. page 295 .February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. See Set Active System. See Set Active One-Line Type. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. etc. Otherwise. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. select a value from the list. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. rigid. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. etc. select a value from the list. select a value from the list. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. horizontal. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 145 . To change the displayed subtype. See Define Active Point.

Subtype. (if applicable) Spec2. select a value from the list. To display the specification itself. The list contains available angles. To change the displayed length. To change the displayed part. select the field. and key in the new value. If straight is not your active Type. The list contains all available specifications. Subtype. and key in the new value. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). Qualifier. select an angle from the list or select the field. and Qualifier for the current specification. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. the Length field does not display on the form. Doing so displays a specification form. 8. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. select a value from the list. Subtype. To change the displayed angle. Design 149 . To change the displayed specification. and Qualifier._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. key in a negative angle. or Angle (if applicable). — OR — Change any of the values for Type. Spec1. Part — Displays the active part. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. You can only review the values in this field. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. select the corresponding Display button.

Doing so displays a specification form. To change the active placepoint. select the *. If Cutback Mode is off. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. Override . Type. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. If only one row matches this criteria. select the Override button. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. If an * displays in the List column. You can only review the information in this column. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. the RCP will be moved accordingly. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. For a list of valid operators.February 2003 Column name . then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. To display the codelist. displays. List . for the given Spec1.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. select the slide bar. which automatically activates it. Column value . Select . then the column value has an associated codelist. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Then select the field. and key in a new value. See Spec1 for a description of the form.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If more than one row matches the criteria. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. the existing RCP location is fixed. Subtype.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. 150 . if any. To change a value. If Cutback Mode is on. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can review and modify the values in this column. containing all matching rows. Clear . and Qualifier. see Annotate Element. then a second form. page 178 .

— OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. Angle . Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. About . If there is no fitting of that nominal size. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. the Place Manual Fitting form displays. select the field. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. To change the displayed angle. select the field. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Secondary. and key in a new value. then the largest fitting available is used. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. then that fitting is used. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. 8. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. To change the displayed axis.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with. Design 151 ._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting.

For example. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. if you set type to form 7c. select a table name from the list. In other words. and vendor display as the active attributes. and vendor to 3. type. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. Similarly. vendor to 3.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. size. 152 . The list contains the available special part tables from the database. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. see the descriptions earlier in this section. material. made of feraloy from vendor 3. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. regardless of the other attribute settings. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. you set the active Table to cond_body. and size to 1/2 inch. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. if you set material to feraloy. To change the active special part table. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. will be displayed in the size list. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. material to feraloy. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. When set to All._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. Design Steps 1.) to construct the three-line symbols. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. radius. orientation. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. Select the Place Manual Fitting command. Such fittings are called special parts._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. page 119 . orientations. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. On the other hand. you should first consider a few points. see Precision Input Form. height. 2. 153 . Go to step 4. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. For more information. etc. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. 3. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. 4. Change fitting descriptions. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. and location. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts.

February 2003 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 154 . — OR — Exit the command. Continue placing manual fittings.

_ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation. Design 155 . Conduit Sizing 8.

This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value.February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. representing zero or more characters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. then the Value has an associated code list. 156 . The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. the system assumes =. This operator is a wild card. If an * displays in the column. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. select the *. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. If you do not enter another operator. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias. This operator is a wild card. To display the code list. representing a single character.

the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. 8. Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields. Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. Design 157 . it is added to the conduit.The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . If more than one cable matches the search criteria.When a conduit is calculated to be full. the PseudoCable form displays. — Increase/Decrease size .

This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. accept input. 3. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. page 268 for more information. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. see Precision Input Form. 158 .February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. you can locate elements. Using the form. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 4. You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 2. reset a command action. Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Define the cables for the conduit. Select the Conduit Sizing command.

a warning message displays._ _______________ 5. Field Descriptions 8. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made. If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. Design 159 . Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit.

reject input. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line. The vertex is inserted. 3. Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. see Precision Input Form. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. see Move One-Line Vertex. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. 160 . To move an inserted vertex._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. The selected one-line highlights. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. page 192 for more information. 2. Steps 1. route one-lines. accept input. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If Automatic Propagation is on. and exit a command.

conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. the value is displayed in the design. For example. select the field and key in a new length. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. To change the displayed length. When on. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. select the field and key in the new value. 161 . You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. This field is informational only. To change the value. there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. field route length. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is.) When set to Keyin. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. Similarly. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed.

About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 162 . and key in a new value. select the field. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. placement point) of the one-line element. sum of the x. and key in a new value. At any point during this operating sequence. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. route one-lines.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the displayed length. page 119. y. you are prompted for the first point (that is. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. accept input. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. select the field. and exit a command. Secondary. To change the displayed angle. reset a command action. Using the form. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To change the displayed axis.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field. see Precision Input Form. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element.

The precision input form displays._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. Design 163 . Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. 2. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. — OR — Exit the command. 3. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications.

164 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct. you assign that area in the duct bank.February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks. All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. By assigning a conduit. The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable. cable or gap to a button. Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons.

Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. cable or gap to a matrix button. If conduit routing is selected. Design 165 . page 256 for more information._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table. Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. If cable routing is selected. Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. See Set Raceway Defaults. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. 8.

The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. accept input. you can define a margin width. If Automatic Propagation is on. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. 2. Define cross section layout using the various commands. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The precision input form displays. See Set Raceway Defaults.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. 166 . 3. page 256 for more information. both width and height. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. If you select Cancel on the warning form. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. Using the form. 4. all conduit/cable information. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. Likewise. any changes you made will be ignored. and exit a command. is assigned to the duct one-line. reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. reject input. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. The duct bank section layout._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. route one-lines. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form.

material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. See Define Duct Cross Section. See Set Active One-Line Type. Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. 167 . See Define One-Line Type. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. page 260 . page 164 . page 268 . units. page 294 . The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. 8. vendor. The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. page 289 . You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command.

Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model. This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix. this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment.February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command. conduit/cable) to manipulate. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. 168 . Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up. you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment.

— OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. Select the Place Stub Up command. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element._ _______________ Steps 1. Go to Step 9. Go to Step 4. The Place Stub Up form displays. Go to Step 14. 4. The precision input form displays. Go to Step 2. 2. Go to Step 6. 3. — OR — Select the Change Association option. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 5. — OR — Exit the option. Select the Select Duct Segment option. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The identified element highlights. Steps 8. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. Go to Step 2. 169 .

9. 12. 11. is displays in the form message field. 170 . Go to Step 7. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Select stub up for modification. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. The precision input form displays. Select the Delete Stub Up option. 8. Go to Step 2.February 2003 6. 7. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. It also deletes all cross sections._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to Step 10. — OR — Exit the option. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Go to Step 2. The identified element highlights. annotation. The precision input form displays. Go to Step 7. propagated elements. Select the Change Association option. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 10. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. The identified element highlights. — OR — Exit the option. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line.

The precision input form displays. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. 17. Select a button from the Button Matrix. 13. Steps 8. Select location to place stub up. Go to Step 2. The stub up is placed down from the given data point._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. 15. displays in the message field. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. 171 . Stub up spec. Design Go to Step 14. Select the Place Stub Up option. 14. has been changed. — OR — Select a option button. Select a button from the Button Matrix. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. Go to Step 2. Select location to place stub up. displays in the message field. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. Go to Step 17. — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. 16. Go to Step 2.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 172 .

173 . one-lines. and propagation. deleting. Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. annotating. moving. three-lines. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. then selecting Palette. and so forth). Available element manipulations include copying._ _______________ 9. annotation. 9. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. within the design file. such as RCPs. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. and three-lines. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter.

page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). 174 . because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. see Precision Input Form. page 119 . Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. any time you are modifying raceway elements. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. you should use these commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. See Setup Commands. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. For reliable results. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands.

Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. including RCPs. and so forth). and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. copy. then selecting Palette. within the design file. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. 175 . one-lines. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. to review or edit element annotation. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. You can use individual commands to move. 9. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. Commands Annotate Element — Places. then selecting Modify Element Commands. annotation. and three-lines. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. reviews. three-lines. and delete specified elements. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements.

Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. from the design file.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. 176 . and elements associated with it.

you can use these commands throughout the design session. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. see Precision Input Form. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. any time you are modifying raceway elements._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. and so forth). Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. 9. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. three-lines. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. annotation. you should use these commands. 177 . Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. not MicroStation manipulation commands. See Setup Commands. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. For reliable results. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. page 119 .

Raceway Connect Points (RCP). The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. straights. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. By definition. reviews. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. three-lines. For straights and fittings. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. and fittings. Using this command. you are allowed only to review the annotation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 178 .February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database.

the field remains null. Once you have deleted the override. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. 9. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. and key in the new value. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. however. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. Empty <Return>s. where New had displayed. You can enter blank spaces into the design. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. then the value derives from the design file. Modify 179 . You can review and modify the values in this field. Where the toggle is On. To change the values associated with the element. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. When modified. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. the corresponding column value comes from user data. You can only review the information in this column. You can only review the Column name column information. the value will display in the design where you place it. Where UD displays in the column. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. select the field. Otherwise. enter nothing into the design. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. If Ref displays in the column._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. If an * displays in the List column. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. If Dgn displays in the column. The next time you enter the annotation form. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. the Access column displays a R/W. select the *. To display the codelist. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. then it will display an R. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. If you can only view (read) the column value. the value is saved back to user data. The key field is updated. using your keyboard space bar. then the value derives from the reference database. If you change a column value. If blanks exist for a field. it becomes an override key to the reference database.

but cannot delete it. You can only review the information in this field. the key specified in the user element is used. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. and key in a new value. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. Otherwise. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and then select Confirm (√). then a second form containing all matching rows displays. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. select the row you want.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. which automatically activates it. you can modify it. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Available operators are described later in this section. If no key exists in the user element. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. Once you place an override key on an element. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. If more than one row matches the criteria. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. To change the displayed value. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. 180 . the Default key is used. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. select the field. If you select Cancel (X). then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). the field remains null. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database.

You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. representing a single character. page 119. accept input. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. 181 . route one-lines. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. the system assumes =. This operator is a wild card. reset a command action. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. representing zero or more characters. and exit a command._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If you do not enter another operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. reject input. This operator is a wild card.

182 . The new value displays in the design file. Select the Annotate Element command. 6. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. three-line. return to Step 2. The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. and place a data point.February 2003 Steps 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. — OR — Exit the command. 5. drop point. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. reset <R> to skip. If you do not locate an acceptable element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When there are no more values to place. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. The system highlights the specified element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 3. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. 2. 4. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. the system displays the message Element not found. The Annotate Element precision input form displays. or RCP). Return to step 2. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. Return to Step 2. This step repeats for each new value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. equipment pointer. Position the column value. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The form displays all the current values associated with the element.

Modify 183 . if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. displayed. these values are loaded into the project database. optionally. When you load the project database. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. When you annotate any raceway element. Field Descriptions 9.

see Precision Input Form. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. page 119. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. reject input. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. you can locate elements. 184 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. 9. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. 2. The Copy Element precision input form displays. Steps The system highlights the specified element. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. Modify 185 . Return to Step 2._ _______________ Steps 1. 3. the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Repeat this step. Select the Copy Element command.

reject input. All associated annotation. If a one-line is moved. route one-lines. and annotation. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and equipment pointers will also be moved. three-line fittings. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. and exit a command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . drop points. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. You can use this command to move one-lines. If an RCP is moved. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. accept input. RCPs. 186 . and equipment pointers will also be moved. three-line fittings. equipment pointers. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. All associated annotation.

The system moves the element to the specified location. Select the Move Element command. Steps The system highlights the specified element. 9. Modify 187 . The Move Element precision input form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable element. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. 2. 3. Return to Step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. Repeat this step. The message disappears when you identify a valid element._ _______________ Steps 1. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. 188 . reject input. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. you can locate elements. route one-lines. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command.

Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. 2. Return to step 2. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element. The clone elements are placed in the design file. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element. The element highlights. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. If you are placing more than one clone. Modify 189 . 3. Steps 9. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. 5. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. Select the Clone Element command._ _______________ Steps 1.

the attached RCP will also move. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Also. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. and exit a command. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved. page 119. Using the form. reject input. accept input. 190 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can locate elements.

Repeat this step. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. Modify 191 . Steps 9. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment._ _______________ Steps 1. page 297 for more information on this toggle. 3. The selected one-line segment highlights. The system moves the segment to the specified location. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. 2. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. See Propagation Setup. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move.

Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. the attached RCP. equipment pointers.February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. and exit a command. If a one-line end vertex is moved. The selected vertex highlights. reject input. 192 . Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. also move with the vertex. along with any annotation. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Steps 1. 2. you can locate elements. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. Using the form.

Repeat this step. page 297 for more information on this toggle. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. Modify 193 . Move One-Line Vertex 9. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on._ _______________ 3. See Propagation Setup.

you can locate elements. see Highlight Propagation Errors. A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. see Precision Input Form. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Propagation Setup. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. reject input. To view errors that occur during propagation. 194 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. page 297 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. page 314 . Using the form. For information about the form.err file. reset a command action. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. This command displays to the screen the pro. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines.

— OR — Exit the command. Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. The Project Run precision input form displays. 195 . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. For information about this table. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. Go to step 2. Fittings 9. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. the system displays the message Element not found. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. see Specification. 3. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. Go to step 1. page 507 . Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. 2. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Propagate Element command. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP.

February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9. Modify 197 .

and Qualifier for the current specification. page 214 . You can only review the values in this field. select a value from the list. Subtype. To change the displayed three-line type. wye. To change the displayed angle. See Remove RCP. rigid.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. and key in the new value. etc.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. 198 . select a value from the list. etc. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. inside vertical. straight. To change the displayed qualifier. The list contains available angles. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. select an angle from the list or select the field.) for that specification. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. To change the displayed subtype. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. horizontal. select a value from the list.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file. etc. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type.

if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. Spec1. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. You can only review the information in this column. select the field.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. You can review and modify the values in this column.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. To change a value. The list contains all available specifications. To change the displayed part. select the Override button. 9. To change the displayed length. To display the specification itself. You can also change any of the values for Type. Qualifier. Subtype. Part — Displays the active part. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. and key in a new value. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. If straight is not your active Type. and key in the new value. Then select the field. the Length field does not display on the form. select a value from the list. 199 ._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). — Column value . and Qualifier. key in a negative angle. and (if applicable) Spec2. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. To change the displayed specification. select a value from the list. select the corresponding Display button. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name . Subtype.

select the slide bar. If an * displays in the List column. then that fitting is used.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Subtype. Type.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. for the given Spec1. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. select the *. then the largest fitting available is used. if any. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. To change the active placepoint. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them.February 2003 — List .Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. — Override . Doing so displays a specification form. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. For a list of valid operators. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. If more than one row matches the criteria. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. See Spec1 for a description of the form. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. To display the codelist. Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. see Annotate Element. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which automatically activates it. page 178 . and Qualifier. If only one row matches this criteria. then the column value has an associated codelist. — Select . — Clear .

type. For example. will be displayed in the size list. select the field. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. material to feraloy. select the field. and size to 1/2 inch. and vendor to 3. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. select a table name from the list. In other words. To change the displayed axis. you set the active Table to cond_body. — About . and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. and key in a new value. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. if you set type to form 7c. size. material. and vendor display as the active attributes. 9. if you set material to feraloy. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. To change the active special part table. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. Similarly. the form changes. vendor to 3. Secondary. To change the displayed angle. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Modify 201 . then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table._ _______________ — Angle . made of feraloy from vendor 3. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays.

all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. regardless of the other attribute settings. select a part from the list. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . height. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. On the other hand. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. page 119 . Such fittings are called special parts. For more information. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. etc. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters.) to construct the three-line symbols. radius. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. you should first consider a few points._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. When set to All. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. To change the active part. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. The list contains all available parts from the table. see the descriptions earlier in this section. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button.

2. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Go to step 4. Edit the fitting as needed. 4. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. Modify 203 . set the toggle to Driven By Table. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Select Confirm when finished. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. 3.

page 119. reset a command action. Using the form. The dashed segment will then be modified. The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. At any point during this operating sequence. The system highlights a valid one-line. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. 2. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. reject input. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. the other segment appears as a dashed line. and exit a command. If you do not locate an acceptable element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. When identified. the system displays the message Element not found. you can locate elements. accept input. 204 . Select the Modify One-Line command. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design.

— OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. Go to step 2. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. 6. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. 4. Repeat this step._ _______________ 3. To terminate the new routes. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. — OR — Reject the element. Data Point Accepts. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. Go to step 2. and return to step 2. Modify One-Line 9. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. The one-line highlights. 5. Modify 205 . place a data point on the original one-line. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section.

February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. 7. — OR — Continue rotating the cross section._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 206 . Accept the rotation and return to step 2.

and exit a command. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. reject input. route one-lines. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. Place Fitting by Rule 9. For example. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. Using the form. then the largest fitting available is used. page 119. see Precision Input Form. You must define the rules in the reference database. you can locate elements. See EE Databases. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. then that fitting is used. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. reset a command action._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. For detailed information about precision input. 207 . accept input. a LB fitting be placed.

displays. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 208 . Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. Select the Place Fitting by Rule command. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation.February 2003 Steps 1.

Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. If Combinable. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. All RCPs must have a system in common. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. 209 . RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. If no coincident RCPs are found. If Invalid. Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. then the RCPs can be merged. 9. Steps 1. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to. then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model.

The RCPs are combined. For each set of coincident RCPs. Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted. changes to Kept. select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the one you selected. You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. and the Status of the remaining RCP. 210 .February 2003 2. 3. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs. 4.

Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. Select Cancel when finished. — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found. 4. Modify 3. 2. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. 211 . Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. If no duplicate one-lines are found. 9. 5. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays. For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s)._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs.

For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. accept input. drop points. Using the form. cosmetic graphics._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 212 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. Steps 1. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. the system displays the message Element not found. reset a command action. and annotation. you can locate elements. The Delete Element precision input form displays. reject input. 2. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. The system highlights the specified element. equipment pointers. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Select the Delete Element command from the menu. You can use this command to delete one-lines. RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached). The message disappears when you identify a valid element.

It also deletes all cross sections. the system deletes it. propagated fittings. annotation. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Modify 213 . Return to step 2. Return to Step 2. and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element. 9._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element. 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion.

accept input. page 119. Once such an RCP is removed. 214 . You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. the two one-lines form a single one-line element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. If both onelines are annotated. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. route one-lines. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. you can locate elements. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command.

the system prompts you to identify another. Modify 215 . Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. The system highlights the specified element._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. Go to Step 2. Select the Remove RCP command. The Remove RCP precision input form displays. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Return to step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. 3. 2. Remove RCP 9. If you accept the RCP. If you reject the RCP. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. the system displays the message Element not found.

February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. Select the Delete Fitting command. Return to step 2. useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This command does not remove the RCP. Steps 1. or the fitting’s RCP. 2. to delete. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. 3. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it. 216 .

reset a command action. Modify Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The selected vertex highlights. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. you can locate elements. 217 . 2. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. page 119._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. reject input. Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. route one-lines. and exit a command. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. 9. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form.

The vertex is removed. Return to step 2. If Automatic Propagation is on. the one-line repropagates.February 2003 3. Return to step 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 218 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove.

For detailed information about precision input.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. the command will repropagate the one-line.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If automatic propagation is toggled on. 9. reject input. see Precision Input Form. Modify 219 . (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. Using the form. reset a command action. and exit a command. page 119. you can locate elements. (See Propagation Setup.

Go to step 2. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. — OR — Reject the element. The system highlights a valid one-line. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry). 3. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices. Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. the system displays the message Element not found. 220 . The Minimize Joints precision input form displays.February 2003 Steps 1. 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to step 2.

then the Project Rule can be assigned. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. Project Rules cannot be assigned. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. the system Percent and the Project Rule. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. If an * displays in the List column. To clear the Project Rule. select the *. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. When a row is selected. Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. 221 . for the systems associated with a single raceway element. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. 9.

reject input. The precision input form displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections. Select the Change System Parameters command. Steps 1. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. page 119. and exit a command.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. — OR — Exit the command. 4. accept input. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. 5. 222 . The identified element highlights.

and delete elements of specified groups. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Annotate Element by Group — Places. and to review or edit element annotation._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. three-lines. 223 . Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. and so forth). You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Topics 9. reviews. then selecting Palette. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. copy. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. annotation.

Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line.February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. 224 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. 9. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. page 119 . any time you are modifying raceway elements. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. See Setup Commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model)._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. three-lines. and so forth). see Precision Input Form. you can use these commands throughout the design session. For detailed information about precision input. you should use these commands. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. 225 . Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. annotation. For reliable results.

To change the active group. using the Hilite option. The active group is highlighted in the list. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. If the toggle is set to Entire Group. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. select the group name key-in field. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. select a group from the list. you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . however. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. To enter a group name. 226 . and key in a name. If the toggle is set to Single Element. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically. Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. In general.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part.

_ _______________
To initiate the Create operation, select the button, key in a group name, and select Accept. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). To initiate the Drop operation, select a group from the Available Groups list, select Drop, and then select Accept. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. To initiate the Copy action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Copy, and key in a new group name. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list.

Define Group

To initiate the Add to operation, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Add to, and then select Accept. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. If you remove all elements from a group, the system automatically drops the entire group. To initiate the Drop from action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Drop from, and then select Accept. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. To initiate the Hilite action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, and select Hilite. It is not necessary to select Accept. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. Types include one-lines, three-lines, RCPs, drop points, to equipment, and all annotation. You must choose at least one element type when creating, adding elements to, or dropping elements from a group.

9. Modify

227

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list. EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems. – One-Line Type - Displays a list of available one-line types.

When you select a one-line type from this list, only those element types (RCPs, onelines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. You can select individual one-line types from this list, or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. – System - Displays a list of available systems.

When you select a system from this list, only those element types (RCPs, one-lines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. You can select individual systems from this list, or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the System list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form. – Attributes - Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes.

228

_ _______________
When you select an element type from this list, an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. Once you have defined the attributes, select the Accept button on the main form. To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes, select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form.

Define Group

Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation, insertion into groups, or deletion from groups. These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group. For example, if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group, and select Fence Block from this list, the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. – Selection - Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. – Fence Block - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. – Fence Shape - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. – View - Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify. – All Elements - Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design.

9. Modify

229

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Steps
1. Select the Define Group command. The Groups form displays. 2. Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. — Use the EE Element Types, EE Method, and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. — Using the Graphic Method you defined, select your elements for the group. The group is created. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form.

— OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. Select one of the group modification commands.

4.

230

_ _______________
Copy Element by Group
This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Copy Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu.

9. Modify

The Copy by Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

231

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Repeat this step. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. 4. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically. 5. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. Elements within the active group highlight. 6. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. The system copies the element as specified. If there are group elements that remain uncopied, you are returned to step 3. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. Otherwise, the command exits automatically.

232

_ _______________
Annotate Element by Group
This command places, reviews, and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes, though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines, three-lines, Raceway Connect Points (RCP), straights, and fittings. For straights and fittings, you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). Using this command, you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components.

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Field Descriptions
Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. You can only review the Column name column information. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. You can review and modify the values in this field. To change the values associated with the element, select the field, and key in the new value. You can enter blank spaces into the design, using your keyboard space bar. Empty <Return>s, however, enter nothing into the design. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. To delete an override on a reference database attribute, select the column value field and delete the blank character. Once you have deleted the override, a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null.

233

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If blanks exist for a field, the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. If Ref displays in the column, then the value derives from the reference database. If Dgn displays in the column, then the value has been defined from the design file. If you change a column value, the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. The next time you enter the annotation form, the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn, where New had displayed. Where UD displays in the column, the corresponding column value comes from user data. When modified, the value is saved back to user data. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If an * displays in the List column, then the column value has a corresponding codelist. To display the codelist, select the *. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value, the Access column displays a R/W. If you can only view (read) the column value, then it will display an R. You can only review the information in this column. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. Where the toggle is On, the value will display in the design where you place it. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field, it becomes an override key to the reference database. The key field is updated, and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database, an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. If you delete the value in this field, a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block, then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line, the key specified in the user element is used. If no key exists in the user element, the Default key is used. Once you place an override key on an element, you can modify it, but cannot delete it. To change the displayed value, select the field, and key in a new value. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. You can only review the information in this field.

234

_ _______________
Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. For example, setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation, the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide, then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. If more than one row matches the criteria, then a second form containing all matching rows displays.

Annotate Element by Group

From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. To add values from the displayed specification table rows, select the row you want, and then select Confirm (√). If you select Cancel (X), the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form, and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button, which automatically activates it.

9. Modify

235

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. If you do not enter another operator, the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing zero or more characters. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing a single character. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value.

>

greater than

numeric

<

less than

numeric

>=

greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to

numeric

<=

numeric

!=

numeric

%

wild card

CHAR

_

underline

CHAR

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command. (For information about the command, see Define Group, page 226 .) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

236

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If there is not a fence in the design, go to step 3. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The system highlights the group contents. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. The command exits automatically. Go to step 1. 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. — OR —

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Reject the highlighted group element. The system highlights another group element. Repeat this step. If no group elements remain, the command exits. 4. 5. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Go to Step 3. 6. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor.

237

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Position the column value, and place a data point. The new value displays in the design file. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. If you set the toggle to Global, the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. When there are no more values to place for the element type, the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. Go to step 3. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single, the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. Go to step 3. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and, optionally, displayed. When you load the project database, these values are loaded into the project database.

238

_ _______________
Clone Element by Group
This command copies the active group multiple times, useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Clone Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Clone Group command.

9. Modify

The Clone Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

239

Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies. 8. 5. If you are placing more than one clone. 4. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. 240 . — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 6. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group. Otherwise. the command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 7. The command exits automatically. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. Go to step 6. The clone elements are placed in the design file. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones.February 2003 3. Return to step 2. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Repeat this step. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. — OR — Reject the active group. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group.

reset a command action. and exit a command. reject input. A fence group overrides the active group.err file. using the Define Group command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Using the form. page 314 . — If you have a fence in the design. 9. At any point during this operating sequence. go to step 4. page 194 . To view errors that occur during propagation._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 241 . Modify Steps 1. see Define Group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. page 119. For information about the form. For information about using this command. page 226. see Precision Input Form. accept input. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. see Highlight Propagation Errors. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. see Propagate Element. go to step 3. go to step 2. The Project by Group precision input form displays. you can locate elements. see Propagation Setup. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. This command displays to the screen the pro. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. You must define a temporary group of elements. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. page 297 . You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form.

Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. go to step 3. or until you exit the command. The system highlights another group element for propagation. If no group elements remain for propagation. the command exits automatically. 3.February 2003 2. Go to step 1. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and exits automatically. the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. The system propagates every element belonging to the group. The system propagates the element. or until you exit the command. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. If no group elements remain._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. and then highlights another group element for propagation. The command exits automatically. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. — OR — Reject the active group. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. the command exits automatically. 242 .

then the largest fitting available is used. 243 . then that fitting is used. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must define the rules in the reference database. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. For example. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. see Precision Input Form. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. page 119. A fence group overrides the active group. see Define Group. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. you can locate elements. 9. using the Define Group command. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. and exit a command. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. accept input. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 226. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. See EE Databases. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command.

— If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 2. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the message No active group defined displays. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. displays. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. 3. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The command exits automatically. Otherwise. go to step 3. go to step 4. — OR — Reject the active group.February 2003 Steps 1. 244 . go to step 2. the command exits automatically. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Repeat this step. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. If you have not defined a group. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. — If you have a fence in the design.

_ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system. see Define Group. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. Steps 1. Select the Add Systems Group command. It will only append systems to the element. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. For example. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). The system(s) is added. 2. page 226 . 3. Modify 245 . This command will not change the master system. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. the system defined at placement. 9. it will not be duplicated. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. The Add Systems form displays.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. While this button is depressed. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. that is. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. the subsystem are all unselected. For example. 246 . This command performs a total replacement of all systems. Systems — Displays all the available systems. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. Project Rules cannot be assigned. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. When a new active system is selected. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system.

Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. drop points. select the *. see Define Group. then the Project Rule can be assigned. The Replace Systems form displays. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. Steps 1. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. If an * displays in the List column. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. one-lines. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. page 226 . A fenced group will override the active temporary group. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. When defining the group for this command. When a row is selected. The active group to be changed highlights. Modify 2. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. 3. Press <D> to accept the group. To clear the Project Rule. Select the Replace Systems by Group command. 247 . The active group is changed to the new system type. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. 9.

reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. A fence group overrides the active group. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 248 .) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s). see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. reject input. route one-lines. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. accept input. If automatic propagation is toggled on.) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. (See Propagation Setup. see Define Group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You must define a temporary group of elements. using the Define Group command. At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. the command will repropagate each affected one-line.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. page 226. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input.

and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). Repeat this step. The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 9. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . go to step 2. the command exits automatically. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. if any remain. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Modify 3. go to step 4. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 3. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. the command exits automatically. and the command exits automatically. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. 4._ _______________ Steps 1. Go to step 3. Repeat this step. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. — If you have a fence in the design. The command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line.

The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 250 . — OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically.February 2003 Accept the active group. The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group.

— If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the message No active group defined displays. Using the form. using the Define Group command. For detailed information about precision input. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and exit a command. go to step 4. route one-lines. you can locate elements. 251 ._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. the contents of the group are deleted. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. page 119. accept input. see Define Group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. You must define a temporary group of elements. page 226. Go to step 3. reject input. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. A fence group overrides the active group. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. see Precision Input Form. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. 2. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. At any point during this operating sequence. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and the command exits automatically. 9. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. go to step 3. go to step 2. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If you have not defined a group.

— OR — Reject the highlighted element. The command exits automatically. 252 . Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. 4. The system deletes the element.February 2003 The command exits automatically. 3. The system deletes all valid elements within the group. Repeat this step._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. the command exits automatically. and prompts you to delete another group element. — OR — Reject the active group.

and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and modifies the default parameters for text. text nodes. reviews. reviews. one-line types. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. systems. RCPs. model annotation. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. Setup Commands In a new design file. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. report IDs. Set Text Defaults — Defines. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group. Symbology Control — Defines._ _______________ 10. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. working view. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. reviews. Setup 253 . and cross sections. review. and symbology settings for your design file. and engineering units. 10. and modify the default parameters.

254 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file.

Setup 255 . 10. Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control)._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands. Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands. For individual command prerequisites. see the appropriate command descriptions.

To change a displayed value. select the field. existing systems. define. page 164 for more information. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. To change a displayed value. and key in a new value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. You can review. between the routed cable/conduit. see Define Duct Cross Section. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. You can review. reviews. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. To change a displayed value. You can review. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. page 164 for more information. such as Color or Active Angle. and key in a new value. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. represented by the matrix buttons. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. including cross section parameters. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. see Define Duct Cross Section. select the field. select the field. and key in a new value. and/or modify the settings. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. symbol defaults. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. Margin Width — Defines the distance. 256 . define. and/or modify the values in these fields. and modifies raceway defaults. define. in sub-units.

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. or drop point). select first the key field and then the Display button. Additionally. RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. and drop point annotation. and/or modify the value in this field. define. To change the displayed value. equipment pointer. define. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. The scale includes views 1 through 8. and/or modify this key. You can review. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. select the field. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. 3. and key in a new value. 2. and key in a new value._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. Setup 257 . The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. You can review. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). To change the current working view. select the field. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. equipment pointer. select the slide bar. To change a displayed value. You can only view this data. 10.

To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. as well as those already selected for the current design file. Select the Define System command.February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. The System Definition form displays. so as to avoid duplication of elements. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). If you need systems not available to you. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. select the Select All button. select the Clear All button. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. 2. To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file. 258 . Steps 1. In order to place one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

3. Define System 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. Setup 259 .

February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. The One Line Type Definition form displays. To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. select the Clear All button. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. so as to avoid duplication of elements. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands. select the Select All button. To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file. The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. Steps 1. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. 260 . If you need one-line types not available to you. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). as well as those already selected for the current design file. Select the Define One-Line Type command.

Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. 10._ _______________ 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Setup 261 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For more information. those oneline types will use a system default. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). page 258 and Define One-Line Type. page 260 . you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed. to make any changes in symbology.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. page 264 . Therefore. In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system. When you enter a new design file. 262 . see Define System. The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. For more information. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. all symbology is taken from the system defaults. Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. see Symbology Control.

Using your cursor. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. Select the Set Symbology Control command. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. Setup 263 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. select the No Overrides button._ _______________ Steps 1. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). 3. 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. 2.

select the field. To change the displayed system. You can review and edit these settings. page 262 for more information about this command).February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system. and key in a new value. select another one-line type from the list. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type. System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. or select the field. The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. The display list contains a list of available systems. System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. and key in the new value. select another system from the list. reviews. 264 . To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). or select the field. and key in a system name. To change a value in the list.

The Symbology Control form displays. Symbology Control 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Setup 265 . 2. 3. Select the Symbology Control command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements._ _______________ Steps 1.

266 . and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text. reviews. or select a value from the list. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). text nodes. or select a value from the list. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. You will enter all values using the Text form. To change the current text string justification. To change the current text node justification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines. Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). and engineering units.

3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. Select the Set Text Defaults command. 10._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. Set Text Defaults Steps 1. 2. The Text form displays. Sub units. Setup 267 . You can only review the displayed settings. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

268 . Define which attributes to use. — THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form.February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. Steps 1. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes. The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command.

_ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. copy it to a nonproduction directory. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. along with all existing cells. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. You must have write access to the library before modifying it. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file. Setup 269 . If you want to modify the delivered library. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands. The cells you create using this command are stored. Create Cell Commands 10. rway.cel. in your cell library. EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. and modify the copied version.

because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. you can use these commands throughout the design session. To display a list of available cell libraries. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 270 . For detailed information about precision input. page 119 .February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands. see Precision Input Form. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file.

To display a list of available cell libraries. Go to step 2. Create Model Cell This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. The Select cell type form displays. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. 4. 2. 10. Setup 5. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. key in rc=. Steps 1. Select the Model button from the form. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. 3._ _______________ Create Model Cell Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. 271 . Select the Create Cell command. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence.

select the field again and key in the new value. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. To make a change or correction. you are prompted to place any new values. When complete. 7. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. page 178 . 8. Placing sheet. 9. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. The Annotate Element form displays. When you accept the fence. key in the value. Return to step 7.February 2003 6. To enter a value. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. 272 . Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. go to step 7. etc. For detailed information about the annotation form. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. select the Column value field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Data point <D> to place. and press <Return>. If you select Annotate. However. go to step 10. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). If you select Close. see Annotate Element.

various error messages will display. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. the Close cell parameters form displays. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. This step repeats for each enter data field. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. select the input box. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. You must enter a cell name. and press <Return>. 10. Refer to Error Messages._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. When complete. When complete. To make a change or correction. select the input box again and key in the new value. To enter a value. Create Model Cell 11. key in the value. you are returned to step 7. 10. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. 12. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11. When you select Close. Setup 273 . confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). The description is optional.

To display a list of available cell libraries. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. 5. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. Steps 1. Select the To Equipment button from the form. 3. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Include all the graphic elements of the component.) Press <D> to accept the fence. Go to step 2. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. 274 . 4. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. The Select cell type form displays. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . key in rc=. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell.February 2003 Create Equipment Pointer Cell This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library.

8. reset <R> to skip 10. 7. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. Placing equipment tag. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. select the Column value field. and press <Return>. Create Equipment Pointer Cell If you select Annotate._ _______________ 6. 275 . Return to step 7. When complete. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. Data point <D> to place. To make a change or correction. For detailed information about the annotation form. When you accept the fence. page 178 . key in the value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. select the field again and key in the new value. To enter a value. Setup For all new displayed text attributes. go to step 7. The Annotate Element form displays. etc. 9. go to step 11. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. see Annotate Element. However. you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. If you select Close.

Return to step 11. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. When complete. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. the Close cell parameters form displays. and press <Return>.February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. 10. To make a change or correction. you are returned to step 7. select the input box. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. 11. select the input box again and key in the new value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Refer to Error Messages. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). various error messages will display. 276 . The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When you select Close. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. key in the value. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. 12. You must enter a cell name. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. The description is optional. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. When complete. To enter a value.

Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). 2. 277 . 5. To display a list of available cell libraries. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. Go to step 2. Select the Drop Point button from the form. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Steps 1._ _______________ Create Drop Point Cell Create Drop Point Cell This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. key in rc=. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence.) Press <D> to accept the fence. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. Include all the graphic elements of the component. 4. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. Setup Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. The Select cell type form displays. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. 3. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. Enter second fence point 10.

select the Column value field. If you select Close. To make a change or correction. If you select Annotate. you are prompted to place any new values. 8. Placing drop point tag. go to step 7.February 2003 6. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. To enter a value. 7. page 178 . 278 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. and press <Return>. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. go to step 11. see Annotate Element. etc. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes. The Annotate Element form displays. For detailed information about the annotation form. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. select the field again and key in the new value. Return to step 7. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. When you accept the fence. Data point <D> to place. However. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). 9. key in the value. When complete.

You must enter a cell name. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. To enter a value. When complete. you are returned to step 7. To make a change or correction. When you select Close. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. and press <Return>. The description is optional. Return to step 11. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. the Close cell parameters form displays. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. various error messages will display. 10. 12. Refer to Error Messages. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. select the input box again and key in the new value. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. Setup 279 . Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. When complete. Create Drop Point Cell 11. 10. key in the value. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√)._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. select the input box. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. This step repeats for each enter data field.

the defined systems. Commands Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters. and the defined one-line types. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file. Annotate Model — Adds.February 2003 Model Commands These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file. Unlock Model — Unlocks the model. or reviews the sheet name in a model. changes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 280 .

Using the Model Commands Before Using These Commands You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. 10. page 119 . For detailed information about precision input. Group Workflow Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model. However. you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session._ _______________ Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. see Precision Input Form. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database. Setup 281 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Therefore. but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Select the Lock Model command.February 2003 Lock Model This command locks the model. The model is locked. Steps 1. If the model was locked when you selected this command. 282 . you should lock your model after setup. the message Model is already locked displays. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Setup 283 . route one-lines. you can locate elements._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. Steps 1. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 10. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. 2. Select the Move Model Annotation command. and exit a command. reject input. and place it. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. — OR — Exit the command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input.

Steps 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model. Select the Unlock Model command.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. 2. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A warning form displays. 3. 284 . you must first unlock the model using this command. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked.

3. 2. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. however. If you want to display the annotation in the model. The Annotate Element form displays. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation. will prevent such duplication. If you toggled Display to On. Steps 1. 10. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 4. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. Select the Annotate Model command. The Load Database process. Setup 285 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 286 .

287 . Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. modify. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters._ _______________ 11. Runtime Setup Commands 11. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file. and allows you to set new active parameters. based on the current active one-line type. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define. Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements.

Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. See Setup Commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types. 288 .

the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. the field remains null. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. If blanks exist for a field. You can review and modify the values in this field. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. To change the values associated with a one-line type. select the column value field and delete the blank character. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. For example. You can enter blank spaces into the design. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. Once you have deleted the override. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. and key in the new value. select this field._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. page 294 ). you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. which is based on the current active one-line type. Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form. Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. 289 . You can only review the information in this field. Otherwise.

then it will display an R. 290 . you can modify it. If an * displays in the List column. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. Once you place an override key on an element. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. the key specified in the user element is used. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. If you delete the value in this field. If you can only view (read) the column value. the field remains null. Otherwise. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . but cannot delete it. Where the toggle is On. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. You can only review the information in this field. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. the Default key is used. The key field is updated. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. To display the codelist. it becomes an override key to the reference database. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. the value will display in the design where you place it. If no key exists in the user element. select the *. and key in a new value. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. select the field. To change the displayed value. You can only review the information in this column. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. the Access column displays a R/W.

and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. If you select Cancel (X)._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. and then select Confirm (√). If more than one row matches the criteria. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. which automatically activates it. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. select the row you want. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. 291 . Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form.

If you do not enter another operator. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. 292 . This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. 3. 2. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. representing zero or more characters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. the system assumes =. This operator is a wild card.

displayed. Runtime 293 . these values are loaded into the project database. optionally._ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. When you load the project database. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11.

The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available. 2. Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. page 260 ). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. From the list. You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. select the one-line type you want to make active. The Active One Line Type form displays. The one-line type you selected highlights. 294 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. Select the Set Active One-Line Type command.February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file.

The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Using the Set Active System form. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Project Rules cannot be assigned. 295 . The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. you can select a new active system from the set of those available. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. Set Active System 11. the subsystems are all unselected. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. While this button is depressed. page 258 ). When a new active system is selected. whereas subsystems do not. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system.

Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. The Active System form displays. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. 4. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. Steps 1. If an * displays. Select the Set Active System command. 296 . 2. 3. To clear the Project Rule. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. select the *. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To access the list of subsystems. When a row is selected. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. press the Subsystem button. then a Project Rule can be assigned. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems.

Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol.Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. cutting them back to leave room for fittings. Sketch . Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification. regardless of the settings on this form. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file.Propagates straight sections only. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. radius. see The Drawing Process. For additional information about propagation. All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Cutback . 297 . Eden . Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it. page 108 .Propagates straight sections and fittings. Rough . Propagation Setup 11. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides.Propagates straight sections.Sketches standard straights and fittings. and extension on the one-lines and RCPs. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. Smooth .

that affect the graphical display of the propagation. The Propagation Setup form displays. If you set the toggle to On. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form. Select the Propagation Setup command. part verification will be performed. 298 . 2. Also. regardless of the status of this toggle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements. automatic propagation is disabled. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change. any changes you make to an element. elements are automatically propagated when placed. Steps 1. 3.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. like editing the size. When the toggle is set to Off. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command.

All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. To change the active view. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file.63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. or select the field. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems. Runtime View — Displays the active view. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. and the levels on which they display. When a level has its display turned on. 1 . They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. select a value from the list. the button appears to be depressed. select the appropriate level number. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. Set Active Levels 11. 299 ._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. their corresponding one-line types. and key in a new value. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle.

300 .February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. The Levels form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select the Set Active Levels command. 3.

_ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. a straight section. If either a one-line. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. a fitting within a run. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. 3. 301 . Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. Steps 1. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. Return to step 2. Return to step 2. or an RCP within a run is selected. This information includes: segment lengths. then run information is displayed. and coordinate location of ends and bends. 2. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. location and radius of each bend in the run. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Display Element Information 11. Select the Display Element Information command.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 302 .

Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. 303 . Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID._ _______________ 12. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. Utilities Commands 12. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. sector/word position) you provide. Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. In addition. You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position. Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file, or shows the coordinate system currently active.

304

_ _______________
Using the Utilities Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Using the Utilities Commands

Before Using These Commands
12. Utilities
You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
In general, you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID, for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID, for example).

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

305

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Toggle Construction Display On/Off
This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. Therefore, this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements.

Steps
1. Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On. 2. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. When construction display is On, the view number displays in a prompt. 3. Press <R> to exit the command. Once you have exited the command, select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle.

306

_ _______________
Highlight Element by Sector/Word
This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG, and both are relative to 1. If the position is valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Element by Sector/Word

Highlight Sector/Word With Filename
12. Utilities
You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. Press <Esc> to exit.

307

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 5. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value. After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

308

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID

Highlight Element by ASID ID

This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. If the ASID ID you specify is valid, the raceway element highlights, but is not added to the working set.

Highlight ASID ID With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. For example, to see where propagation errors exist in your design file, you can specify the file pro.err. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for a file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

12. Utilities

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. The Select hilite asid mode form displays.

2.

Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command.

309

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. Go to step 6. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. Return to step 1. 4. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. 5. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. 6. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename, a file display form displays.

310

_ _______________
Select a line that contains an ASID ID. 7. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to step 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode. Return to step 1.

Highlight Element by ASID ID

After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. Go to step 8.

12. Utilities

8.

Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted.

9.

Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to step 5. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Return to step 3.

311

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Element by Link
This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. If the entity and mslink are valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Link With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Link command. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. 5. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values.

312

_ _______________
After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window

Highlight Element by Link

12. Utilities

Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

313

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Propagation Errors
This command highlights propagation errors in the design file.

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. The pro.err file displays.

2.

Review the errors listed on the form. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file, select the error(s) from the list, and select Confirm (√). The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file, and the pro.err form redisplays. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors.

3.

Continue highlighting propagation errors. Go to step 2. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command.

314

_ _______________
Display Sector/Word Value
This command displays the sector and word position, in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Display Sector/Word Value

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Sector/Word command. Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for, and accept it with a <D>. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

12. Utilities

315

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Display Element Type and ASID ID
This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID), in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command.

316

12. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>. 2. Display Link Steps 1. in the MicroStation command window. Select the Display Link command. Utilities 317 . mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. of an identified element._ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink.

and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. reject input. page 119. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 2. 318 . accept input. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. Steps 1. reset a command action. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The identified element highlights. For detailed information about precision input. The precision input form displays. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. — OR — Exit the command.

Display System and One-Line Type 12. and subsystems (if applicable). 319 . Go to step 2. The system prompts you to identify another element. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Go to step 2. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element._ _______________ 3. system. The system prompts you to identify another element. Continue identifying elements in the design file. 4. — OR — Exit the command. The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type.

Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you desire to change the coordinate system. model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. 320 . This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model. Activate Plant Coordinate System. Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Instead. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project.

13._ _______________ 13. 321 . then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session. Operating Information Because the operating sequence. and screen prompts vary for each command. command key-ins. 322 . instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section. Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command. Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck.

All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. 13. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin.

The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. 324 . Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. The columns are optional for Load Database. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables.

The message file is created on every run of the process. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. Accept will load database. 13. When complete. Select Load database command. select Confirm (√). Database 3. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. or accept the displayed defaults. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and the process begins. the message above displays. the message above displays. Steps 2. 325 . where you may review the errors. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. The Load database screen displays. When you are finished completing the input information._ _______________ Steps 1. and is displayed automatically to the screen. Enter error and output filenames. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.

Key in any information that is not supplied by default.) 326 .February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. an input screen displays. see Create Project for the directory structure. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. These reports report on the project and reference databases._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat file (win32app\eerway\data). You must load the project database before running any reports. When you process a report. select the output file box and key in a new name. To change the output filename. All reports are kept in the /reports directory. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. You can change the name of the output file or error file. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. See Reports.

You should give each report you want to save a unique name. Select the report you want to run from the list. 2. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. 13._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. 3. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 . Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. you should name the output files yourself. For instance. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. the new file will overwrite that file. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Report Steps 1. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. 4. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Select the Report command.

and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. 328 .February 2003 direction._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

see Reports. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. For more detailed information about each rule check. page 545 . The name of the rule check report displays at the top. or change that information according to your specifications. Database This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. an input screen displays. When you process a rule check. You must load the project database before running any rule checks.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. 329 ._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. Overview 13. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database.

2. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area.February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project. you should name the output files yourself. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. 3. Select the Rule command. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. 4. 330 . Steps 1. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report. the new file will destroy the previously created file. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

(See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes. based on the design filename you specify._ _______________ 14. based on the internal sheet name you specify. 14. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Raceway Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes./rway/dgn directory. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database.. that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database. EERWAY Processes 331 . with the name you specify.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections: Raceway Processes Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s .

The total graphical length of the one-line in master units.February 2003 Load Database This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. 2. The graphical length of the straight in master units. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. 1. you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information. one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* 332 . Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. Thus. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively.

*** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. 333 . Enter drawing name._ _______________ str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** Load Database Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. Steps 1. * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. EERWAY Processes 2. The Load database screen displays. 14. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. and select Confirm (√). The columns are optional for Load Database. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. Select Load database from the Process menu.

where you may review the errors. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. the message above displays. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. and is displayed automatically to the screen. 5. Confirm your selections. 334 . or accept the displayed defaults._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . It lists everything that was loaded into the database. page 64 ). 4. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. When you are finished completing the input information. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Background.February 2003 3. Select the desired operating mode. The message file is created on every run of the process. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. When complete. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. select Confirm (√). and the process begins. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Enter error and output filenames. the message above displays. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between Foreground.

bat: Batch File Option SET SET SET SET SET SET MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ 14._ _______________ Batch File Option The load database process can be executed from a batch file. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway. EERWAY Processes 335 .bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Setup an rway.

336 . unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. Steps 1. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). The process will not modify anything in the reference database. 2. nor will it delete information from user-defined tables. 3. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Unload from the Process menu. one-lines. The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. and select Confirm (√).February 2003 Unload Design This process unloads a design from a relational database. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). Enter design name. based on the design filename you specify. The Unload Design database screen displays.

background. the message above displays. The . lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.err file.msg file. When complete. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√). Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. 14. Confirm your selections. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 5. Unload Design When you are finished completing the input information. and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and lists everything that was loaded into the database. EERWAY Processes 337 ._ _______________ 4. The . the message above displays. and the process begins. page 64 ). The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Select the desired operating mode. You may choose between foreground. is created on every run of the process.

The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. 338 . The Unload Sheet database screen displays. Key in a sheet name. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing. 2. If the sheet name contains blanks. since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block. Steps 1. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu. it must be specified in single quotes. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. based on the internal sheet name you specify. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). and select Confirm (√). and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . one-lines.February 2003 Unload Sheet This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database. The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). 3.

and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. select Confirm (√). Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.err file. and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The . Select the desired operating mode. The . 14. You may choose between foreground.msg file. EERWAY Processes You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. Unload Sheet When you are finished completing the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. background. When complete. the message above displays. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. is created on every run of the process. 5. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and the process begins. 4. unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. Confirm your selections. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. the message above displays. 339 . page 64 ).

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . onelines. or accept the displayed defaults. but for some reason was not removed from the database.February 2003 Cleanup Database This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. 340 . Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing. Steps 1. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. For example. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu. It then makes a list of all valid drawings. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). Enter error and output filenames. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. and select Confirm (√). This process will not delete drawings. and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. 2. The Cleanup Database screen displays.

_ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. When complete. 14. Background. page 64 ). Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. is created. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. 4. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. The . You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. The process begins. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.msg file. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. You may choose between Foreground. 341 . the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. 3.err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. It will display mostly zeroes. the message above displays. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. Select the desired operating mode. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing. Confirm your selections. The . select Confirm (√). the message above displays.

February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). Enter design name.env>. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). Steps 1.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays. Upon completion. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. 342 . After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. the process writes the file to <current_project>. 3. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields.

You may choose between foreground. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. Confirm your selections.err file. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. Otherwise. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review.msg file. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. The process begins. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the above message displays. 14. background. 5. the above message displays. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Select the desired operating mode. Otherwise. displays all processing information. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). When complete.prj/rway/tmp directory. select the Confirm button (√). Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. EERWAY Processes 343 . lists all errors that occurred during the process._ _______________ 4.prj/rway/tmp directory.

Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. Enter design name. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. Steps 1.env>. Upon completion. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 344 . you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. the process writes the file to <current_project>. 4. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). Key in a name for the envelope file.prj/rway/dgn/<filename.

_ _______________ 5. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. lists all errors that occurred during the process. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. Confirm your selections. background. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. The . Otherwise. 14. displays all processing information. Select the desired operating mode. The process begins. the above message displays.prj/rway/tmp directory. 6. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the above message displays. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Otherwise. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The .err file. When complete.prj/rway/tmp directory. EERWAY Processes 345 . You may choose between foreground. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. select the Confirm button (√).msg file. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes).

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 346 .

Each Eden process is described in a separate section. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library. 15. and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. page 59 . You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. then edit the . If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. manipulate the Eden symbol library. List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file.EErc file in your home directory. then edit the to specify the appropriate directory. The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. and edit the Eden symbol file. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. Eden Processes 347 . You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . For information about accessing the processes. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment._ _______________ 15. Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation.

348 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file.

To change the displayed output filename. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. and key in a filename. See Eden Symbol Generation. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol source file. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed default library name. and key in a new filename. To enter the symbol source file. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new option. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. select the field. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. To change the displayed error filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed option. 15. 349 . page 513 for information about symbol file creation. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). and key in a new library name. select the field. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. For information about the path to the symbol library.

an ASCII file located in the current working directory. contains any output from the process. background. Confirm your selections. The . the message above displays. 3. Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. page 89. see Output. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can choose between foreground.err file. see EDEN. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. When you have completed the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.February 2003 Steps 1. page 67 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. 350 . and batch operating modes. The . and the Eden process begins. 2. You can view either file on the screen. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and select Confirm (√).err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. For information about operating modes.msg file. select Confirm (√). The . 4. the above message displays. Select the desired operating mode. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.

Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Eden Processes 351 . For information about the path to the symbol library. 15. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol source file. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. and key in a new library name. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To enter the symbol name. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. and key in the name. select the field. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new filename. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent.

background. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see EDEN. Select the desired operating mode. For information about operating modes. You can view either file on the screen. and select Confirm (√). and the Eden process begins. 3. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. the above message displays. page 89. 352 . When you have completed the input information. and batch operating modes. 4. page 67 . Confirm your selections. the message above displays. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays.February 2003 Steps 1. 2. contains any output from the process. The . You can choose between foreground.err file. Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.msg file. see Output. select Confirm (√).

see the description at the beginning of this chapter._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed error filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. 15. select the field. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. and key in a new library name. Eden Processes 353 . select the field. select the field. and key in a new filename. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed library name.

Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. 4. see EDEN. The . and the Eden process begins. page 67 . page 89._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 3. and batch operating modes. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. You can view either file on the screen. You can choose between foreground. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The .err file. the message above displays. see Output.February 2003 Steps 1. and select Confirm (√). The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. 2. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications.msg file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. background. contains any output from the process. select Confirm (√). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. For information about operating modes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. When you have completed the input information. the above message displays. Select the desired operating mode. 354 . Confirm your selections.

Steps 1. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. select the field. 3. and select Confirm (√). select the field. and key in a new library name. Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. 2. For information about operating modes. You can choose between foreground. The List EDEN User Functions form displays. select the field. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. page 67 . Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. 15. To change the displayed output filename._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. 355 . and batch operating modes. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed error filename. background. see EDEN. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new filename. and key in a new filename.

an ASCII file located in the current working directory. contains any output from the process. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file. the above message displays. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.February 2003 4. and the list will display.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.msg file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The . the message above displays. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . see Output. page 89. You can view either file on the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. select Confirm (√). 356 . Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information.

To enter a library name. To change the displayed output filename. 15. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. To enter a library name. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. and key in a name. see the description at the beginning of this chapter._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. 2. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. 357 . select the field. Eden Processes Steps 1. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. and key in a name. The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. and select Confirm (√). Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. For information about the path to the symbol library.

4. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 358 . The . page 67 . Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and batch operating modes. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When you have completed the input information. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. see Output. the message above displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Confirm your selections. The . You can view either file on the screen. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the above message displays. and the Eden process begins.February 2003 3. see EDEN.err file.msg file. The . background. Select the desired operating mode. page 89. You can choose between foreground. contains any output from the process. select Confirm (√). For information about operating modes.

For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a new filename. select the field. select the field. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. and batch operating modes. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and key in a new filename. You can choose between foreground. and select Confirm (√). see EDEN. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. To change the displayed output filename. page 67 . Eden Processes 2. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. 359 . background. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 15. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Steps 1. Select the desired operating mode. For information about operating modes. To change the displayed library name. The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. select the field. To change the displayed error filename.

contains any output from the process.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.msg file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√). When you have completed the input information. the above message displays. The . 360 . Confirm your selections. see Output. The . The . the message above displays. page 89.err file. and the Eden process begins. You can view either file on the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.February 2003 4.

and key in a new library name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed library name. for example). The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. To change the displayed error filename. and key in a new filename. select the field. and key in the name. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. then edit the . select the field._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. Eden Processes 361 . 15. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. and key in a new filename.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. For information about the path to the symbol library. To enter the symbol name. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden. select the field. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent.

2. 3. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. 4. page 67 . The . the above message displays. see Output. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. see EDEN. background. Select the desired operating mode.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√).msg file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file. 362 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Steps 1. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the message above displays. contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√). Confirm your selections. The . When you have completed the input information. You can view either file on the screen. You can choose between foreground. For information about operating modes. page 89. The . and batch operating modes. and the Eden process begins.

then edit the . select the field. The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. To enter the user function name. 15. select the field. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. select the field. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. To change the displayed output filename. To change the displayed error filename. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in the name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Eden Processes 363 . for example).EErc file in win32app\eenuc. To change the displayed library name. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory. and key in a new library name. and key in a new filename.

and select Confirm (√). 2. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. select Confirm (√). page 67 . see EDEN. Confirm your selections.err file. background. You can choose between foreground. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.February 2003 Steps 1. The . the message above displays. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and batch operating modes. Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. 3. 4.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. For information about operating modes. 364 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and the Eden process begins. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. When you have completed the input information. The .

The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen. see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the above message displays. The . Extract EDEN User Function From Library 15. Eden Processes 365 . page 89. contains any output from the process.msg file._ _______________ Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

and key in a new filename. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. 366 . Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. and key in a symbol file name. select the field. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. To change the displayed error filename. To enter a symbol filename. and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. It is only available on a graphics terminal. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol source file. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field.February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. To change the displayed editor. select the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The . and select Confirm (√). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the message above displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications._ _______________ Steps 1. Steps Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.msg file.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. For information about operating modes. Eden Processes 367 . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. see Output. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the above message displays. contains any output from the process. 4. The . page 67 . see EDEN. and the Eden process begins. page 89. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list.err file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. You can view either file on the screen. select Confirm (√). The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. 3. and batch operating modes. You can choose between foreground. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. When you have completed the input information. background. Confirm your selections. 15. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 368 .

create a window containing a specific element. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS. Integrated Commands 369 . providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules. review the PDS clashes in a model. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. 16. Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar._ _______________ 16. not when running standalone EE Raceway.

Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection. 370 . Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can use these commands throughout the design session. and must have an existing clash in the design area. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file.February 2003 Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups.

Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Integrated Commands 371 . Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command. Review PDS Attributes Parameters Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. 16. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box._ _______________ 16. you need to display construction type elements. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments). Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database.1 Review PDS Attributes The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component.

You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. click Attach.2 Reference PDS Model The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach. 372 . click Attach. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach. then.February 2003 16. then._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Attach – Attaches a reference model.

_ _______________ Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Reference PDS Model 16. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. Integrated Commands 373 .

Options Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. One Line Tag.February 2003 16. PE HVAC. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting. Equipment. Depending on which discipline you select. Drop Point Tag.3 Window to Named PDS Item The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. Instrument Component Number. Inspection Iso ID. the item attributes you can search for changes. or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files. Line ID. or Raceway. 374 . — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label. Piping Component Number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. You can select: Piping. Pipe Tag.

or. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash._ _______________ 16. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Design Area – Displays the active design area name. Integrated Commands 375 . Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Review PDS Clash Parameters Project Name – Displays the active project name. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved.4 Review PDS Clash The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes. 16. select the field and key in a marker number. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database.

Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view. 376 . Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Click Select View then select the view you want to update.

Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. Asid <numeric value>. 377 . Asid <numeric value>. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load.

Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Recovery: Change element annotation. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. Asid <numeric value>. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Recovery: Change element annotation. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. 378 .

Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. when highlighting by sector and word. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. 379 . Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. Recovery: None.

Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. 380 . Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Cannot Place Cross Section. If the problem persists.".February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and replace the one-line. If the problem persists. digits. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. or ". Invalid sys on oneline. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. and replace the one-line. Recovery: Key in another cell name. Cannot Place Cross Section. call Intergraph support. Invalid olt on oneline. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. call Intergraph support. "$". Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated.

Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. 381 . Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command.ins is not in the proper location. Recovery: None.

Could not get one line type from user data. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line.February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. 382 . Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Please export this variable. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support.

Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. based on cause of error. 383 . Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: There are various recoveries._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: None. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: None. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it.

Recovery: Enter correct filename. Could not write to TCB. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. If the key does not exist. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. insert it into the reference database. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 384 . Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. The database is case-dependent. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. Recovery: Key in a new key value.

Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. change the spec. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. Recovery: None. 385 . Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. Recovery: Enter design filename. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library.

Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation.February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. 386 . Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation.

Propagation status may not be recorded. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. 387 . Recovery: Make sure the pro. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid.err did not close properly. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Enter a new asid number._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Error closing propagation log file.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Recovery: Enter a new value. Reason: File pro. Recovery: Change access to design file.

Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Recovery: Add entries to reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. 388 . Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file.

Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. 389 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Recovery: Correct entry. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation.EErc file. Reason: Internal error.

Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. 390 . Recovery: Add privilege to the database.

Error No Placepoints or No Elements. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. 391 . and one element. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error opening design file <string>. one datum point.

Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref.sql file. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. 392 .

393 . Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Recovery: Add privileges to database.sql file. A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid.

Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Recovery: Add privilege.February 2003 Error saving symbology . Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. The sheet name must be unique within the database. 394 . Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database.

Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Recovery: Fix other errors. A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Recovery: None. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Reason: Internal error. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: Key in a value. 395 . Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process.

or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. 396 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. change the spec. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Reason: An illegal angle exists. extension or transition of the fitting. at a cross. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>.February 2003 File <string> exists. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. For example. Recovery: Modify the radius. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent.

Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Recovery: Fatal error. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. a form could not be displayed by the software. Recovery: Call Intergraph support._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. 397 . Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Possible memory allocation problem. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Try to exit and re-enter the software. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form.

Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted./config/assign file. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area.February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 398 .

For example. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Invalid Eden Processor Input. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. Reason: The symbolname is blank. 399 . Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation.

Recovery: Key in another value. For example. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0.February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. Invalid key in . 400 . Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. If it is a cable entry. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. Recovery: Enter an integer value. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. vertex <numeric value>. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. 401 . Invalid RCP . Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Enter a valid response.

Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. 402 . Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation.February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

. RT. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. LC. CB. CT. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. and place the element or RCP. 403 . LC. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>.. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. or RB. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. Recovery: Fix other problems._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. RC.or RB in the justification field. Must be LT. CC. LB. . Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. Recovery: Enter LT. Reason: Invalid text justification entered.

Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command.February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 404 .cel). No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file.

Recovery: Key in another name. A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. C for the cross section type. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. B. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. or C in the active specification. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. 405 . B. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product.

Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. 406 . No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type.February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. Recovery: Populate the database.

No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. 407 . Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column.

Placing Straight Section with No Length. Recovery: Select another option. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA.February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Recovery: None. 408 . Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol.

409 . title block._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Select failed. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Recovery: Enter schema name. three-line. RCP). Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Recovery: Specify new find criteria.

Recovery: Enter sheet name.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. 410 . Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. Recovery: Change sheet name. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Identify a valid text element. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table.February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located.

Recovery: None. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. cannot be edited. snap to the angle. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. A: Error Messages Title block placed ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. 411 . To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. therefore. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines.

Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. Recovery: If necessary. 412 ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Change the title block annotation. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines./config/assign file and that its value is a full path.

A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. 413 . you must key in a group name. Recovery: Key in the desired group name.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 414 .

Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility.cmd file and customizing menus. Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases.cmd file contains the alias. Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. reports. Appendix I: rway. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section. You can modify or disable this function through the file. It attaches the panel menu. B: System/App Mgmt. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes.cmds contains the rway. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify.cmds file. rule checks. Appendix H: alias._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager.cmd file as it is delivered. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files. 415 . Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway.

Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them. 416 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process.

Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform). ee_out_ht_diam real not null.cmd. Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway.cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. ee_extension real. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. ee_units integer not null. 417 .EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. To change the form design. 1. set the variable EE_PIFORM in the .unl files and database tables. ee_dimension_2 real. and rway. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. ee_out_width real. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing. For detailed information about editing your . ee_dimension_1 real. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. alias. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure.

create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key).unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key). 418 .unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db. You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. char(28) not null. create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor). ee_tl_subtype integer. ee_weight real. grant all on trench_spec to public. ee_description char(40) ). For sample files. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part char(20). ee_angle real. create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). refer to the tray_spec and tray_part . char(20). 3. create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). All delivered . ee_spec_key char(28). real. Create a <one-line_type>_spec.unl file.February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. ee_spec2_key char(28).unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type. or you can add the data to your vendor. ee_part_key char(28) not null.unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. 2. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). char(6). grant all on trench_part to public. ee_symbol char(6). char(40) ). ee_tl_qual integer. real. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database.

You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part. see the appendix entitled EE Databases.unl files and database tables. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec. For information about codelists. Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables.cmd file.unl file. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. 1. B: System/App Mgmt. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. Customizing 5. 9. For detailed information about editing your . Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. 419 . consult the appendix entitled EE Databases.unl files to the rwayref.unl" DELIMITER "|".unl file.unl file._ _______________ Appendix B: 4. INSERT INTO tray_part. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref. 7. 8. 6.unl file.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part.

or you can insert records in the vendor. 4. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width). You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database.unl file.cmd file. char(20). 5. grant all on transit to public. 2. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). For a sample special fitting . real not null. 7. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). real.unl" DELIMITER "|". 6. char(28) not null. Add the newly-created <special fitting>. Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table. For basic information about creating Eden symbols. 420 . real. char(20).unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway.February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table.unl file. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. char(6). INSERT INTO pullbox. refer to the pullbox. create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key). char(40) ).unl file to the rwayref. real. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor). You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting. 3.unl file.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. Create a <special fitting>. or you add the data to your tlt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. or by inserting a record in the mscolref.unl file.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg.msg files. Use a standard text editor to modify the error. or by inserting a record in the manprt._ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). 10. or by inserting a record in the mscatref. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. You cannot change this name. To the right of each = is the message itself. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. 11. 9. In these files. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database.unl file.unl file. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database. B: System/App Mgmt. which you can modify. 8. For information about codelists. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. 421 . Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table.

The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session. "am=n. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement. "am=ustn. Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds. Directory for the message files. the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables.February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway.cs". or "am=n. 422 .men. The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee. Used as a pointer to application programs. File containing EE Raceway symbols.h1".sb" (i. and EE Raceway-specific variables. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig. Defines the path to the on-line Help files. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms. They include Microstation. EE Nucleus.ndx) files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Sets the directory for the on-line Help files. Sets the directory for temporary files.sb1"). This directory is also the location of user command index (.e. This variable will override the user preferences setting. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command.cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols.

MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. User-defined project database cmd file. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. Reference Database cmd file. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. Directory path for the RIS product.EErc file. Default remote path for archive/restore. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Project Database sql file. Reference Database sql file. Directory path for seed files. Schema name for project database. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. User-defined reference database sql file. it must be set to "A". 423 . Filename for the Eden symbol library. Default nodename for archive/restore. Directory path for data files. Directory path for the Eden symbol library. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. Directory path for message files. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. User-defined reference database cmd file. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. B: System/App Mgmt. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. Directory path for data files. Directory path and project database name. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. User-defined project database sql file. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Default username for archive/restore. Project Database cmd file. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. A variable used for ORACLE databases.

EE reference database server process. Directory path for EE forms. Filename of EE symbol file. Directory path for ORACLE executables. Schema name for reference database. 424 . Directory path for INGRES executables.February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for EE symbol file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Data files for DB Access Support.

You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database. RIS. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. a generic relational database interface. On-line Informix. the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. Oracle. and Ingres._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. such as symbol and part information. The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. The reference database is identified when you enter a project. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. Thus. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). C: EE Databases 425 . that is. Processes needed in the procedures above. (For those familiar with EDES. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. that supports it. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product.

you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement. to attach to an SQL-type database. Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product. which you define._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product. Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways.) 426 . the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another. in fact. The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema.

After you have created an empty database. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. local or remote. page 50). that was created using RIS Schema Manager. — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine.) This process will create the risschema definition file. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. To do so. using the risschema_mgr process. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. For more information about the risschema file. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information. ownerships. C: EE Databases 427 . see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product.

cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema.cmd) file that defines which . you must have at least: — an SQL (. you can also include: — a command (.unl files to load into which tables. — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .sql file. you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg.unl files that are listed in the .February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. To run it outside of the EE Environment. — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given .sql file -c . the process will: — add new tables listed in the ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .sql) file which contains the table and column structure.sql file] [-c .cmd files. — load those tables having a unique index with data from the . If you want to load a schema with default information. and then key in the command line syntax for the process. the process loads it only if the table is empty.sql file. If Update schema is used with a . — AND — — the corresponding .sql file. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match.cmd file] schema name -v -q .unl file(s) which contain default information.sql file that has a different structure than the original . This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q .sql file. 428 . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu. Where a table lacks a unique index.

created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref._ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. C: EE Databases 429 .cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema. You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema.

one-lines. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. and equipment pointers.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. straights. RCP. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. drop points. for example. one-line.February 2003 Reference Schema . the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. if the reference schema is custom-built. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. All specification information is carried in the reference database. 2. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . tray_spec. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. and so forth) during a design session. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. 3. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. raceway connect points (RCPs). Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. and tray_part tables. For example. RCPs. the drawing. But if the project schema is custom-built. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. including. 430 . fittings. You can establish default attributes for drawings. one-lines. Reporting. Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes.

The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form. C: EE Databases 431 .General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema . Text annotation overrides any default values. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form. Text annotation overrides any default values. Text annotation overrides any default values.

not approved 432 .approved 7 . Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database.approved 3 .February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database. You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow.approved 10 .approved 6 . the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 .approved 9 .blank 2 .approved 8 .approved 11 .approved 4 . fitting. but you must not remove any of the existing rows. You can add new approval status rows to this table. The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist. For example. Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values.approved 5 . the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . During loads of the project database. and one_line tables in the project database.

The table contains the index_column column. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information. but you must not remove the existing row. 433 . You can add new drawing types to this table. which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. You must not add or remove to this table. The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations.

The table contains the index_column column. ee_part. The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type. ee_ol. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 .February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The table also contains the ee_spec. and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). remove. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. You can modify the index_value values. The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. You can add. The system table contains the system_num column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You must not add or remove rows from this table. nor should you modify the index_column values.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . You must not add or remove rows from the table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product. The table contains the index_column column.

You must not add or remove rows from the table. nor should you modify the index_column values. The table contains the index_column column._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. You must not add or remove rows from the table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types. nor should you modify the index_column values. The table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You can modify the index_value values.

You can add vendors as necessary to this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must not add or remove rows from this table. but do not remove the rows delivered with the product. The unit table contains the index_column column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. The vendor table contains the index_column column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 .February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values.

You may add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 . The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.

February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 .

You may add or remove rows from this table._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. 441 .

February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) 443 . 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system)

Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table
This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column, which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table, the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description

The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant, cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-, Moisture-, Heat- and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos, glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering)

444

_ _______________
Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-, Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat- and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene

Codelists

Yes-No Codelist Table
The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. You must not add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description

C: EE Databases

The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes

445

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Fitting Environment Rules
The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands. The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. You can add, remove, or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway. The software, at least, compares the number of intersection one-lines, the one-line type, and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. If found, the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number, zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name

The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90,180 90 90,180,270 90,180 90,180,270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY

446

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Fitting Environment Rules

Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90, 180, 270 Non-Planar Angle = 90

C: EE Databases

447

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Project Schema - General Description
The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing; its one-lines, RCPs, and three-lines. Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database.

448

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Updating Schemas

Updating Schemas
Before you can update (that is, load with EE tables and default data) a schema, you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX, ORACLE, INGRES). Additionally, you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database.

Updating a Project Schema
Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update project schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists.

C: EE Databases

Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Updating Reference Schemas
Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update reference schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists. Sql and Cmd Files

449

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Schema Names
When creating your RIS schemas, you should use the same name as your project, since this will be the default name when you enter the project. However, you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/.EErc file to be your project schema name.

450

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Modifying the Reference Schema

Modifying the Reference Schema
You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. To modify the database schema before schema creation, simply include the necessary changes in the .sql file before Update schema is executed. The .sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. The SQL statements in the .sql file are the input to the Update schema process. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete. Therefore, columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the .sql file. For example, columns are added into the .sql file for the one_line table, these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema, the following actions take place: 1. 2. 3. 4. Saves rows from existing table. Drops existing table (also drops indexes). Creates new table according to "create table" statement. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition.

C: EE Databases

If rows exist in the updated table, any new columns that are added will be blank in each row. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. Therefore, you need only to modify the ".sql" file in order to modify a schema. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. 1. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ".sql" file, you would lose any data that may have been on that column. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. You can modify the size of a column, for example, from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer", but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur. If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10), for example), then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. The .unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored; the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. If a table does not have a unique index, then the .unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty.

2. 3.

4.

5.

Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_". They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema.

451

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *.unl files as defined in the command file. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the .unl files into the database. These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults, part data, and codelist values. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table. Certain columns are defined in the .sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the .unl file must not be null for that column. There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. The .unl files can be modified before the schema is updated. — OR —

You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1. the RDBMS’s interactive query product, such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS, or ORACLE’s sqlplus, or INGRES’s SQL. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui.exe). DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr.exe)

2. 3.

4.

The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1. To see which .unl files are being loaded into the reference database, look at the command (.cmd) file you will be using. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file:

FILE "olt.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO ol_type;

These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt.unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table. In this case the "olt.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e.g. FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt.unl). The delimiter is one character long. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl file. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current .unl files from being loaded. All existing .unl files must be loaded for proper product execution. 2. Edit the desired .unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1|

452

_ _______________
Appendix C: In this example, "1" is the index_column value, "TRAY" is the index_value column value, "240" is the ee_spec_table column, etc. If in the "olt.unl" file you would like to add additional entries, you can edit this file. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. The following example demonstrates how to load a new .unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. 1. 2. cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref.cmd. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO tray_spec; 3. Create a new file in the current directory, naming it catalog.unl. Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database, separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). For example:

Modifying the Reference Schema

1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV|

C: EE Databases

4.

When you have finished editing the .unl file, run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table.

453

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

approv_status
This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank, approved, not approved, and so forth. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes

index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status.

away_part
This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes

ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type.

454

Appendix C:

_ _______________

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description

ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer, this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

away_spec
This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material, and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes

C: EE Databases

ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.

455

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. The only valid entries are: A, B, or C. The associated shapes are shown below.

ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key.

cardinal
This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left, center left, bottom left, and so forth). Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point.

456

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 457 . material: the column used to define the conduit body material. weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size.

style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. for example NEC 1990. 458 . then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations. ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.

ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight. C: EE Databases 459 . ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type.

ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 460 . weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. material: the column used to define the conduit material.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification.

drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. The associated shapes are shown below. or C. drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. B. The only valid entries are: A. 461 .

ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software. ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. material: the column used to define the ductbank material. duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 462 .

ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. or C. B. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. 463 . column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process. The only valid entries are: A.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. 464 . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description.

ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. 465 . Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul.

466 . ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable. ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable.February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . config: the cable configuration of the cable.

Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. 467 . Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. where the information crosses products. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. If not. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. In some entries. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 468 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag.February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value. EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system.

469 . voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE.

num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. 470 . ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature.

Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements. In general. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. pullbox). mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. 471 . ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting.

Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. and DBAccess all support this table. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration. MicroStation 32. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. RISRPT. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. 472 . screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535.

473 . column_name: the name of a column in the database. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. index_column: a column name that. the work_mode value is set to zero. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. In general. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. It must exactly match the column name in the database. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. if not NULL.

ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. conduit. and so forth).February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. wireway. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description. 474 . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type.

475 . panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number. ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. prj_name: this column contains the project name. location: this column contains the location. 476 . ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. ee_description:this column contains the key description. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key.

ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software. C: EE Databases 477 . material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software . ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor.

rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs). Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting.February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. 478 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.

ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Zero if no check is to be performed. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. 479 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP.

cross. wye. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. 480 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. and so forth). bendable._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . flexible. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. elbow. reducer. tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. and so forth). tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. horizontal. and so forth). Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. 481 . Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle. 482 . ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype.

ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. C: EE Databases 483 . ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.

The only valid entries are: A. 484 . B. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name. catalog: the column that contains catalog information. wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. or C. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The associated shapes are shown below. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. 485 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

486 . ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. or C. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The only valid entries are: A. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the wireway material. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . B.

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

cabsch_spec
This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the revision number. cable_numb: the column containing the area number, cable number, and cable number ID. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors.

487

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number. not_used: this column is reserved for later use. plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique.

488

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

cndsch_spec
This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number, conduit number, and conduit number ID. drawing_numb can have duplicate values, but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit, for example power, control, and so forth. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to.

489

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number.

490

_ _______________
Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

drawing
This table, used by all EE products, contains general information about each EE design file. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing. ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path.

C: EE Databases

sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database.

drop_point
This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table.

491

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point.

duct_fill
This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number, cable number, and cable number number ID. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule.

ee_pseudo_cable
This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.

492

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_system
This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems.

envelope
This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes

C: EE Databases

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. Space envelopes are not available at time of printing.

493

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

fitting
This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length.

494

_ _______________
Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database).

C: EE Databases

fit_to_sys
This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes

ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys.

495

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

mscatalog
This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

tablename: the name of the table in the database. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.

496

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

mscolumns
This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. Currently, there are no EE processors using this table. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no

entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. column_name: the name of a column in the database. It must exactly match the column name in the database. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only, while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. This column can also be thought of as a filter. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form, the work_mode value is set to zero. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form.

C: EE Databases

497

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

ol_to_sys
This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule.

one_line
This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table.

498

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file.

C: EE Databases

499

ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. project This table contains specification information for the project. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 . ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information.February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description.

rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. 501 . EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process). location: the column containing location. base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table.

Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. 502 . pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table.February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. 503 . ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table. ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing.

material: the column containing the straight section material. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. 504 . pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification.

505 . to_support symbols are not available at time of printing. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the support tag. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw.

February 2003 506 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox. airway._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes.unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. This process allows you to add records to an existing . Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n). key in SPEC at the command prompt.unl file or to create a new . wireway.sav extension to the specified table name.sav file.sav file. Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product.unl file. D: Specs 507 . copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec. If you answer n to the prompt. The system will attach a . the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified . The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray.unl file easily and efficiently.sav before running the process. The process will then write all records to this . SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory.unl and <one-line type>_spec. If you intend to add records to an existing . These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications. and conduit. To initiate the process. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements.unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part. and will then write all records to that file.

unl file to keep the records you have added. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified.sav file back to the corresponding . press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary.sav file.sav file and redisplays the column names.February 2003 The system processes the information. Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Once you enter the final value for the displayed table. Copy the . Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your . For subsequent records. in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. 508 . You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C. the system writes the information to the .

unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 ._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample . tray_spec.unl Files The following are examples of .unl Files Sample . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values.unl files you will load into your reference database tables.

the spec table contains all specifications. 510 . For information about running Update Reference Schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment.unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables. while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables. the . As described previously. the outside height dimension in sub-units.February 2003 tray_part. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. the outside width dimension in sub-units. tray_spec and tray_part. the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. a dimension variable used by Eden. the fitting extension. a dimension variable used by Eden.unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created.

the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. the Eden symbol. the tray specification description. the weight per unit length of the run. the tray part catalog number. the fitting turn angle. the tray specification key. D: Specs 511 . * For information about the codelist values. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the construction type.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table. the cross section symbol. the tray part description. the secondary tray specification key for reducers. the tray part weight. the tray material. the unique tray specification key._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. the fitting bend radius. Sample . the unique tray part key. the index_column value from the tl_qual table.

60.45.45.90._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .60.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 . and Adjustable 30.60.90.90.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30. and Adjustable 30.45. and Adjustable 90.

etc. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. To review or modify the symbols in this library. and special parts. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs. fittings. and special parts (conduit bodies.) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 ._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command. Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden.). However. The delivered symbol library is called eden. fittings. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives. draw_arc. For additional information about the Eden symbol language.). pullboxes. etc. use the delivered Eden processes.

radius. val3. angle . ========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow. angle.0 . height . 0. height. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . val1. val5. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation. with or without extensions.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 . 0. 0.eq.or.eq. angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2.0 . extension. val2. val4.eq.or. val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow.February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file.0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid .

Point[0]. height. 0. Point[0]. Point[0]. Point[0]. 0. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. 0. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. height.0. (Point[3]. NUMPTS. -halfwid. -val1. 0. (Point[2]. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. Point[0]. 0. 0. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. 0. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 0 ) then Do i = 1._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. -val1. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0. -halfwid. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. 0 ) 0. 0 ) 0. 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2].-extension. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 ) Endif 515 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. Point[0] ) Point[0]. 0. val2. -val4. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. NUMPTS. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. Point[0]. 0 ) 0. (Point[4]. halfwid. Point[i]. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. radius.ne.0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. val3. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension . 0. 0. Point[BND2]. Point[0]. Point[0]. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. 0 ) Do i = 1. 0. Point[ORG]. 0. Point[0]. halfwid. 0. Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. val5. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. val6.

-angle. 0. height. -halfwid. 0 ) Do i = 1.Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1]. 0. halfwid. 0. (Point[2]. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. (Point[4]. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i]. 0. Point[0]. 516 . 1. NUMPTS. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. NUMPTS. Point[0]. For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter. height. Point[1]. Point[i].Point[2]. -halfwid. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. NUMPTS. 0 ) 0. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . Point[0]. When defining parts in the reference database. halfwid. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 ) 0._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . extension. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG].Point[BND2]. (Point[3]. 0 ) 0. 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 0 ) Do i = 1. Point[0].ne.Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. 0.

ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table . EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database.... ..ee_out_wid Spec Table . EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol. . If the fitting has extensions..... .. height... the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP.... see the table immediately following this description....ee_dimension_2 . Dimension 25 Spec Table ......ee_out_wid Spec Table .ee_extension Spec Table . extension... while other critical points are defined relative to the origin.. For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions.. The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution..ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ... It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement.. Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow..ee_radius Spec Table ._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow...ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table . For specification-driven parts..ee_extension 517 .ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table ... 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 . width... . Spec Table . the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .......... .. Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden.ee_transition Spec Table . ..... In general... The symbol derives the values for angle.. The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives.. and radius from the global array DIMENSION. The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation..... they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string.

......... .ee_radius Spec Table .........ee_dimension_1 Part Table .. .... Dimension 25 Spec Table ... ..........ee_transition Spec Table . .. Spec Table .... ..ee_dimension_2 ................ee_dimension_2 .ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 . ..February 2003 54 55 56 57 .........ee_dimension_60 518 . .._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ............ 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ........ 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ....... ...... ... .. ............ Part Table ... Dimension 60 From Part Table .... ........ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ....

It also describes the contents of directories and some files. 519 . By default._ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. It identifies those files you can modify. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below.

. /usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 . The product may reside on any file system./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory. The following files exist under the .February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable.

and then invokes the EE environment. — remove. eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes.txt – File containing release notices. problems. — product. — EEnotice. 521 . — .sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. The files are grouped by directory._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.def – product definition file. — legend – copyright notice file. and EE WPD. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process. C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. etc. INFORMIX.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. comments. EE Nucleus.

— risql – EE reporting utility. 522 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — reeprj – remote environment process.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — mscrecol. — eemgr – system manager environment process. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. INFORMIX variables. — eeprj – environment process. Also kills stray processes. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases. — print. and product variables. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes. This file can be edited.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. — create_db – create database process. — mount – supports less disk installation.

— eepsp. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms.txt – less disk information.txt – EE project setup information. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — lessd. doc/ – directory that contains documentation. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — dba* files – DB Access files.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway. /usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 .

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. — product. cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files. unload drawing. — remove. comments. problems. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. — load – processor to load the project database. The files are grouped by directory. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. and clean database processes. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables. These files can be modified. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.def – product definition file. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. 527 . etc. — menu.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine.

528 . Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus. — rule_chk. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database.dat – controls standard report management. and cell library. Attaches the function bar menu. — rway.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help. function key menu. — mstr_rway. This may be customized. — help_rway. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. Also contains .February 2003 — eden. This may be customized. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands. — process. available cell libraries.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help. msseed.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — report. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library.s – master help source file. — eden. and any design files delivered with the product.dat – controls rule check report management.hp – help pointer file.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. — mstr_rway.dat – controls process management. Sample .lib – the Eden symbol library file.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat – controls Eden processes. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory.s – help source file.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help. — help_rway. You can supply additional menu files. – – seed.

and logo.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. — error. The software requires this directory. – merge_pnl – panel menu file. This file can be extended.arc file for each report listed below. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. This directory also contains the available precision input forms.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. The source files may be edited by the user. — alias. — command.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. — annot_form – form file for annotation. There is an . – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation. — rwaybar. 529 . — prompt. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files.ace and an .msg – message file containing messages for status field. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. tmp/ – Holds any temporary files.bar – bar menu source file. — rway_ref. — rway.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. — rwaypnl.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. prompting messages. — status. — rway. — rway_prj. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.ace)and compiled (.pnl – panel menu source file. report/ – Contains the source (.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field.

February 2003 530 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Rule.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert). # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.Default..Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file. # 531 . # # eden. You may want to write your own processes.dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.dat report._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.dat control the scrolling lists for the Process.Switch | . # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. rule_chk. eden.Path. This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process.dat..dat manager.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process.Default. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.1 0. .dat. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. and Output. and Output menus..dat. Report. respectively.. Rule. and print. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.dat print.Path. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.. The manager.bat -c \ | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered.dat 13.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. Report.-O.dat process. ..dat rule_chk. \ | Enter symbol source file . report.

# # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -l \ | Enter library name .. # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%. \ \ | Enter symbol name .%EDEN_LIB%.bat -d\ | Enter library name .. # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor. # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. d # e n # ... \ | Merge from library name .bat -C \ # | Enter library name .. # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name.bat -s \ | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%....bat -eu \ b | Enter library name .. # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%....%EDEN_LIB%.February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. 532 .%EDEN_LIB%.bat -e \ n | Enter library name ..notepad.bat -u \ | Enter library name ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden...bat -m \ | Merge into library name .. \ a t | Enter symbol name .%EDEN_LIB%. # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. \ | Enter symbol name ...

exe \ | Enter design name.Default.Default.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference.%RWAY_DGN%.1 0.exe \ | Enter one design name.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 . # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.%RWAY_DGN%.. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.dat process.dat #ident "@(#)data:process.Switch | . This was # done to handle schema passwords..Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.Path. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory.<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form.dat 13. .. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.exe \ | Enter design name. # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln. # # process.%RWAY_DGN%. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.-f \ | Enter envelope name.._ _______________ Appendix G: process.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. . any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line.exe \ | Enter design name. # So. These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered. The password will # have to be handled accordingly. The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.Path. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both).exe -s \ | Enter sheet.%RWAY_DGN%.. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.

.dat 7.dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. # # report.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema.0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name.) as the delimeter. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. .Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.February 2003 report. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted. # # They are: # Prompt.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.. .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema.dat #ident "@(#)data:report.Default | .1 0. # The second field is the command field.

cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.. Default | ..dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk. # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file. # The second field is the command field.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 .dat rule_chk. .) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt.dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. # # rule_chk.1 0.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. . # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat 13. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.

# # print.PATH.default. # The command can be any command to output a file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 print. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function.path and switch... # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name.. # The first column of comment line must be #.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name.SWITCH. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt. A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter.. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print.dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory. This field should be used to pass # information to the command. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list.0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.1 0. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX..DEFAULT. # (The path is not relevant). # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 .dat 21..

dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.Path.dat #ident "@(#)env:manager.. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ | Enter x schema name. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database ...cmd \ |Enter schema name.Path. -s e # # m #Compress database .0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.Default. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol. . # # manager. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.. _ # Any of the sub-fields r the third field can be omitted in p # t # ..Default.1 0.Switch | .dat manager. .dat 21.) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt._ _______________ Appendix G: manager. G: Customizing Environment 537 ..

February 2003 538 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

H: alias. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique.cmd.1 0. You can use any text editor to modify the file. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software.cmd file Appendix H alias. The alias. If you were to add this example to the alias. the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond.cmd file. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 . and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command. the format of such an entry.cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias. The alias.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg.cmd file. a sample entry.cmd file. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element._ _______________ Appendix H: alias.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name. For example. The example in the alias. You do not need to add entries to the alias.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias.

February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cmd file 541 .cmd file H: alias._ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.

February 2003 542 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cmds 543 .) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus.cmd The file rway. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command.cmd file may also be edited by the user.. This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature.cmd Appendix I rway.._ _______________ Appendix I: rway. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed.prAttaching EE Raceway Menus.ammfile. The rway.cmd file to be executed.amm m. add mmenus ee_rway:menu.cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway. If you do not want the rway.pr I: rway.

February 2003 544 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the reference database and. Created through DB Access. the Project Data View Reference Guide. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. This is the name of any current RIS schema. This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library. either local or remote. in some cases. Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. is supported. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 .. Project Dataview. Report templates created through DB Access. i. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. both.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. and print conditions.. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS.e. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". Any RISsupported relational database. layout.

) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access..) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through.[wtr_p5] When you create a template..February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates.. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed. third. and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0].e.rpt" added to the end. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema". etc. Thus. and use a schema from the schema list. etc. If you wish to override this name. second.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i.... up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5).. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0".) 546 . Certain variables may be exported. the "-o" option can be used._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second. whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first. default file name that they write to. with a ". The first parameter is read into wtr_p0. "select value_a from table_b where. Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema".

ref_db. This file: Selects the desired database tables.sheet Associated Software/Files 1. found in $EE_NUC/bin. load_date._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. Project Database drwlst (RIS) . 3. J: Reports 547 . Formats information into readable form. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.the RIS process. filename. sheet. 2.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. and sorts them by sheet name. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. Information Output: Drawing. dba_rpt . drawing_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables.

Information Output: System. ee_out_width. dba_rpt .February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. Project Database mto_rpt . Selects the desired columns from those tables. 2. ee_out_width. ee_tl_type. 3. This file: Selects the desired database tables.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_part._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_tl_subtype. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. ee_out_ht_diam. system_name Straight. ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Formats information into readable form.the RIS process. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. found in $EE_NUC/bin. description Fitting. ee_ol_type. ee_ol_type. 548 .

Selects the desired columns from those tables. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template. 2. This file: Selects the desired database tables.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam. 3. ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_part. ee_out_width. Project Database rway_bom . description Fitting. J: Reports 549 . For flexible conduit elbow fittings. dba_rpt . found in $EE_NUC/bin. Formats information into readable form. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_tl_type. ee_tl_subtype. ee_out_width.the RIS process. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. Information Output: Straight. ee_ol_type. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections.

The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. For instance._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. For flexible conduit elbow fittings.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. 550 . the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate.

ee_out_ht_diam. found in $EE_NUC/bin. dba_rpt . 3. ee_tl_length.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template. Formats information into readable form. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_out_width. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.the RIS process. ee_part. ee_out_ht_diam. J: Reports 551 . description Fitting. ee_ol_type. ee_tl_type. 2. ee_out_width. ee_ol_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables. Project Database rway_bom_vol . ee_tl_subtype. This file: Selects the desired database tables.

the RIS process. 552 . 3. ee_tl_type. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_out_width. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. ee_part.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_out_ht_diam. Information Output: System. Project Database blank_ids . 2. found in $EE_NUC/bin._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . description Fitting. system_name Straight. dba_rpt . ee_tl_subtype.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank. ee_ol_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. ee_out_width. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. Formats information into readable form. ee_tl_length. ee_ol_type.

This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. If you select any of the buttons. If you select one of the schemas in the list. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating. When you select Reset. then information about that schema is displayed. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. and dropping RIS schemas. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. 553 . changing. RIS Schema Manager terminates. any active secondary forms are erased. and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. When you select Cancel (X)._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide.

554 . or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form.February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is. with the exception of the Schema Name field. It reads information about existing schemas._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a read only form. You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form.

3. 555 ._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. If the selected database type requires additional information. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Select the Display Databases button. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. 2. input fields for that information display. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. If you select one of the databases. Key in all information in the input fields. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. select one of the Network Protocol fields. and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. select Run to create the schema. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. This form creates new RIS schemas. Once you have entered all necessary information. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS.

the user password. Selecting Run drops the schema. To modify the schema node. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. 556 . either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. and the schema node. When you have entered all necessary information.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. To modify the user password. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. select Run to alter the schema. while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. you need only to enter the new password. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. When you select one of these options. To select the schema to be altered._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To select a schema to drop. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields.

Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. column type. The column position. This form consists of a list of all the tables. and clears the list. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field. views. A field to search for a specific column is also provided._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. Drop Table. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. and Alter Table) will accept input. column name. If the selected schema requires a password. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. 557 .

In Drop Column Mode. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. In Modify Column Mode. 558 . The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. Once the table definition is complete. Drop Column. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. which behaves as expected. There is the usual set. Then there is the second set. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. This form has two sets of Control buttons. column definitions can be modified. columns can be dropped from the table definition. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. and Modify Column. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. new columns can be added to the table definition. in the upper right corner of the form. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. If a column is chosen in the table definition list. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table. select Run to create the table. In Insert Column Mode. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. Select Reset to clear the form. while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field.

Once the new column is defined. Selecting Reset clears the form. 559 . select Run to alter the table. Selecting Reset clears the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. K: RIS Schema Mgr. It can only append one new column to an existing table. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command. Selecting Run drops the table. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form.

Additionally. Selecting Reset clears the form settings. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form.February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network. Selecting Reset clears the form. 560 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off. an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct.

Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. T for TCP/IP. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions. L for LU6. If the lock file does not exist. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. If the filename is not a full pathname. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. a unique key to identify the database The database type. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 .2 The network address (must be an address. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. This file is the schema lock file. D for DNP (DECnet). the lock file must be replaced manually. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists.LCK extension. A line separates entries. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. In these cases. I for Ingres. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. O for Oracle. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. then the schema file is in use. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. If there is no network address given. the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. Currently supported values are X for XNS. Although you can use multiple files. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID. The values found in the create schema option clause. currently supported values are X for Informix._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine.

2.2 and the default value is lu6. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed.142. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. This value is case-sensitive.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs. The valid value is lu6._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . There are two logical units. The valid value is cics and the default value is cics.135.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located.155 PROTOCOL= 562 . This value is case-sensitive. This value is case-sensitive. the other on the IBM. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses.135. This value is case-sensitive. the CICS transaction name. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. This value is case-sensitive. one on the Clipper. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370.142. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users.

This allows for additional protocols in the future.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry. 563 ._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8. Currently. If the file is corrupted or removed. All these entries are created by the create schema statement. they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements. only the first protocol in the list will be used.H:.

February 2003 564 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. To run EE Manager. if you are entering the environment for the first time. see Appendix N. Once you have successfully entered your password. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. the EE Manager form displays: 565 . the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file. For detailed information on setting environment variables.

566 . In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary.February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . It uses DB Access to query and edit tables. and update rows. delete rows.

place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. or edit the value displayed in the field. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. and insert a row or group of rows. and functions which enable you to change. which allow you to search the database. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. delete. If no find criteria exist. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. The number on the button changes to reflect the row. Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. 567 . or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. this command finds all rows in the current table. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. Release the mouse button to display the row. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. which shows the current find criteria. To go directly to a certain row. These buttons include various Query functions.

You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields. 568 . Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. and Update Active fields. The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. As long as this command is active. Multiple column searches are processed in order. When you are certain the data is correct. you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes).February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Add Query columns. By default. When you select Update Active. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file. You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF.

Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 ._ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification.

February 2003 570 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu.cfg file to the list. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list. 571 .cfg file._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform.cfg is located. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu.

cfg file. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes.cfg file. 6. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. The description. 8. When complete.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. Double click on the EE Configure icon. click on the Delete button. continue the same process as above. To delete the variable. Steps 1. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. 3. To edit the values of other variables. 4. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. appears in the Descrip field. 5. Edit the entry in the Value field. 2. The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. 572 . if any. This same field can be used to add a new variable._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. 7. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee.

Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. unlike system software which runs other software. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). An attribute of a database table._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. character client column command confirm button 573 . Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. or channel for moving requests. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. created through NQS. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. the menus. All network operations (database. and then manipulated as individual elements. it controls the message fields. See also path name and relative path name. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. NFS. In network operations. A group of columns defines a table in a database. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. Software designed to meet specific needs. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. A queue. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. and the keyboard. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations.

The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. for example. A nonaddressable component of a network. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. For example. the most common of which are memory violations.0. or erase. Normally._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .0. eliminate. that is. though this is not required. and user-generated quit signals. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. bus errors. destroy. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. and to select commands from forms and menus. to accept previously selected elements. or processed by a specific program. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. disk drive. Y. Also known as key-in field. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. tape drive. interpreted. A separating mark or space. place elements. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. or Z axis. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. and Z axes of the design cube. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. identify and accept elements. a component onto which a user cannot log. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. and floppy disk. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. Y. whereby points are located by traversing the X. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. illegal instructions. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . To remove.

) of interest about which information is stored. a field. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. A relational database management system supported by RIS._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. or positive. and so forth. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. An object (project. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. a list of the data available for that field is displayed. a relational database table. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. See also relative path name. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. that responds to information. See interference envelope. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. drawing. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. When selected. difference in longitude. A pictorial representation or image. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. element. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. such as a button. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. A relational database management system supported by RIS. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . a symbol that graphically identifies a command. or a checklist. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. including the file name.

the Current Command field. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. It is divided into the Command Status field.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. Network File System. and the Key-in field. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or alias. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. or it can mean the connected system. to which you can snap. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. the Prompt field. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. A name. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. A point on an element. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. Also known as a data entry field. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. including vertices. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. A graphic representation or schema.

vendor’s catalog data. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. job specifications. A relational database management system supported by RIS. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. but is level._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. Reference Database. or indicate a specific point in the design file. See also path name and absolute path name. graphics symbology. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. y. and z-axes intersect. To turn. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. In coordinate geometry. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. The sequence of directories leading to a file. the point where the x. See also absolute path name and relative path name. and is three-dimensional. Network Queuing System. report formats and other information of a similar manner. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . commodity libraries. label descriptions. to change the angular orientation. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. having no elevations or depressions. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues.

and weight. dash-dot. y.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. The x. stay on the disk until they are called for.y. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. In network operations.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. Language developed by IBM for creating._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. One collection of column values for a table. The display style of an element. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. style. and querying relational databases. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. To switch. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. and z axes. The defined area of vision on a screen. This means that unneeded files and data. the software can perform processing more quickly. to change between two alternatives. that are stored in an attribute. solid. Views are created with their own x. modifying. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. A name that provides access to an account on the system. and so forth.z). A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. A collection of data for quick reference. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. See also active depth. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 . generally represented as a line. NFS. either entered by the user or determined by the software. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. All network operations (database. Data. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. The software uses virtual memory to store data. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. including color.

Glossary N: EE Configure 579 ._ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.

February 2003 580 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 327. 234 list column 179. 234 model 285 one-line 178. 234 override button 180. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 234 select button 180. 109. 234. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 235 override keys 179._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 415. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179. 550 bin/ 521. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 235 display toggle 179. 235 source column 179.cmd 529.

278. 275._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277. 276 model 271 library 269. 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 279 equipment pointer 274. 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 .msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522.

332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 . 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323. 279 equipment pointer 274. 278. 527 database 321. 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 275._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277.

dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 . 278._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden.February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179. 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277.

80.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 275. 276 keys 431 place 144 error. 84. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274._ _______________ ee. 78. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 . 79. 81. 87. 83.cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522. 82. 86. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway.

hp 528 help_rway. 357.February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262. 342. 271 eden symbol 353. 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 359. 234. 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 . 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 264.

cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .sh 522 msg/ 523._ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu.

290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146. 235 keys 115. 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 . 52.February 2003 msseed. 234. 48. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dgn 528 mstr_rway.s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180. 179.hp 528 mstr_rway.

132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print. 567 process. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53. 527 product. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521. 297 sketch 113. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 ._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112. 55.dat 522.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113. 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521.def 521. 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157.dat 528.

327.cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.sym 529 rway. 534 reports 117. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115. 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar.dat 528.tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454.cmd file 543 rway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72.sym 529 rway_prj.tbl 529 rway_ref.dat 528. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 . 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521.pnl 529 rwaypnl. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report.

449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed.dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 .msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status._ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428.

48.February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 55 processing 53. 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 . 109. 52. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 . 449 reference 55. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 415. 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27. 449 project 52. 55.unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 . 327._ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72.

February 2003 594 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.02.00. .

........ 619 Rotate Copy Group .................................................................................................................. 627 Annotate Model............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 637 596 ............................................................... 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9................................................................................... 609 Rotate Copy Element.......................... 599 Utilities .......... 623 Mirror Copy Group.............. 633 EE Nucleus File Structure .......... 621 Mirror Group ........ 613 Mirror Copy Element.......................................................................................................................................................................... 611 Mirror Element .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment ............................................................................................................................................................. 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9......................................... 607 Rotate Element..................................2)........................................................................................3) ..................... 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16.. 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 617 Rotate Group..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 598 Load Reference Schema ......................... 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) ................4).................................. 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5............................. 634 EE Raceway File Structure..... 597 Modeling............... 625 Move Group....................................................2) ....................................................

reporting. Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema. the EE Raceway Environment form displays. and rule checks. Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment. EDEN symbols.PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. 597 . Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. The selected model displays in MicroStation. Click Accept. Click Accept. 2. 3. 4. 598 . Select a design area from the list. Steps 1. Select a model from the list. The Raceway Designer form displays.

SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. keeping column data where column names match. 599 .sql file that has a different structure from the original . — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition.sql file. or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given . Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project.sql file.unl files to load into which tables. You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.sql file. — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . the process loads it only if the table is empty.unl files that are listed in the .cmd files. SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. If a table lacks a unique index. CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which .Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. If you update the schema with a . SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the .sql file.

unl files to load into which tables.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which . 600 .unl files to load into which tables. CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .

and Rule commands. EDEN. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. Report.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases. 601 . Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes.

Rotate Copy.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. 602 .1 version of the document).4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details. • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Mirror.

then selecting Palette. 603 . Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.

604 . then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.

605 . then selecting Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. then selecting Palette.

then selecting Palette.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. 606 .

607 . • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. reviews. then selecting Modify Element Commands. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. You can use individual commands to move. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Rotate Copy. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. including RCPs. copy. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details. Annotate Element — Places. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Mirror. then selecting Palette. and three-lines. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. three-lines.Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file.1 version of the document). and so forth). to review or edit element annotation. and delete specified elements. annotation. onelines. within the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements.

608 . from the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. and elements associated with it. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements.

you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. route one-lines. accept input. For detailed information about precision input. You can use this command to move one-lines. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. and equipment pointers will also be moved. All associated annotation. If an RCP is rotated. RCPs. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. If a one-line is rotated. All associated annotation. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. reset a command action. three-line fittings. and exit a command. three-line fittings. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. To change the angle. and equipment pointers will also be moved. equipment pointers. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. drop points. 609 .

Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. 610 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. 2. Select the Rotate Element command. The Specify Rotation form displays. the system displays the message Element not found. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Click Accept. 4. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The system highlights the specified element. 3. The element rotates to the specified position. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Steps 1.

and exit a command. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. accept input. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. you can locate elements. reject input. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. To change the angle.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. 611 . The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. At any point during this operating sequence. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. see Precision Input Form.

Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. 5. The element copy displays at the specified position. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays. 3. The Specify Rotation form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable element. the system displays the message Element not found. The system highlights the specified element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Select the Rotate Copy Element command.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. 612 . 2. Click Accept. 4. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element.

and annotation. equipment pointers. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If an RCP is rotated. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. accept input. You can use this command to mirror one-lines. three-line fittings. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. toggle among the three axes (Primary. reset a command action. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. All associated annotation. reject input. All associated annotation. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Using the form. Secondary. To reset a 613 . the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. For detailed information about precision input. and equipment pointers will also be moved. and equipment pointers will also be moved. and exit a command.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. At any point during this operating sequence. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. If a one-line is mirrored. drop points. RCPs. To change the displayed axis. select the field and type a new angle. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. three-line fittings. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To change the displayed angle. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines.

614 . The Mirror Element precision input form displays. the system displays the message Element not found. The system highlights the specified element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. The element rotates to the specified position. Steps 1. Click Accept. 2. 4. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. The Orient Mirror form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Select the Mirror Element command.

Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. To change the displayed axis. route one-lines. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. Select the Mirror Copy Element command. toggle among the three axes (Primary. accept input. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. For detailed information about precision input. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. and exit a command.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. select the field and type a new angle. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. reset a command action. Secondary. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input. Using the form. 615 . see Precision Input Form. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. To change the displayed angle. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. Steps 1. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. The element copy displays at the specified position. the system displays the message Element not found. 4. The Orient Mirror form displays. Click Accept. Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. The system highlights the specified element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 616 . The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 3. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. 5. Specify the point around which to mirror the element.

three-lines. copy. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. and delete elements of specified groups. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Rotate Copy. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. 617 . Mirror. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. The following information has been modified: Rotate. and to review or edit element annotation.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7. Mirror Copy. then selecting Modify Group Commands. annotation. and Move Group commands See the following text for details. and so forth). You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. then selecting Palette.1 version of the document).

Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. 618 . Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. reviews. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.

Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. RCPs. accept input.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. You can use this command to move one-lines. and equipment pointers will also be moved. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. equipment pointers. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. To change the angle. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. All associated annotation. All associated annotation. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. route one-lines. reset a command action. three-line fittings. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. If a one-line is rotated. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If an RCP is rotated. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Using the form. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. reject input. see Precision Input Form. 619 . drop points. and equipment pointers will also be moved. three-line fittings. and annotation.

The message disappears when you identify a valid group. The Rotate Group precision input form displays. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. 620 . you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. The Specify Rotation form displays. 5. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The system highlights the specified group. Select the Rotate Group command.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. 4. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. The group rotates to the specified position. For groups in Single Element mode. Click Accept. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. the system displays the message Group not found. 2. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. 3.

The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. To change the angle. Using the form. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. 621 . The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. accept input. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. reject input. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. Steps 1. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

5.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. The system highlights the specified group. 622 . The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. The group copy displays at the specified position. 4. Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. For groups in Single Element mode. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. 3. the system displays the message Group not found. The Specify Rotation form displays. 2.

All associated annotation. All associated annotation. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Secondary. accept input. reset a command action. three-line fittings. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. and equipment pointers will also be moved. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. and equipment pointers will also be moved. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. If an RCP is rotated. see Precision Input Form. To change the displayed axis. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. three-line fittings. To reset a 623 . About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. you can locate elements. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. To change the displayed angle. At any point during this operating sequence. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. reject input. Using the form. select the field and type a new angle. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. If one-lines are mirrored.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.

The message disappears when you identify a valid group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. 624 . Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Orient Mirror form displays. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. The Mirror Group precision input form displays. Specify the point about which to mirror the group. 4. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. 2. 3. Select the Mirror Group command. The system highlights the specified group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The group moves to the specified position. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. For groups in Single Element mode. Click Accept. the system displays the message Group not found. 5.

you can locate elements. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. To change the displayed angle. Steps 1. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. To change the displayed axis. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Using the form. Secondary. 625 . select the field and type a new angle. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. route one-lines. toggle among the three axes (Primary. For detailed information about precision input. reject input.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.

If you do not locate an acceptable group. The group copy displays at the specified position. the system displays the message Group not found. Specify the point around which to mirror the group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 626 . 4. The system highlights the specified group. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 5. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. For groups in Single Element mode. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. 3. The Orient Mirror form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. Click Accept.

route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The system highlights the specified group. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 627 . The message disappears when you identify a valid group. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. 2. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. 4. The Move Group precision input form displays. 3. Steps 1. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Select the Move Group command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Using the form. the system displays the message Group not found. reject input. The group moves to the specified position. you can locate elements.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Specify a placement point to which to move the group. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input.

If you want to display the annotation in the model. Select the Annotate Model command. If you toggled Display to On. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. The Load Database process. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p.1 version of the document). however. If the user does not specify a sheet number. 628 . 4. will prevent such duplication. The Annotate Element form displays. —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. the sheet number is automatically set to match the . 285 in the PDS 7. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. 3.dgn file name of the raceway model. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. 2. Steps 1.

Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Snap.1 version of the document). Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. The following information has been modified: Display. then. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. and Locate toggles See the following text for details. 629 .Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. then. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. click Attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. click Attach. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model.

You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. 630 . Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Snap. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Attach – Attaches a reference model. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Snap. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file.

Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. and EE_SCHEMA.exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east.EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7.exe file See the following text for details. pds_north. Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 . it is necessary to use the ee72upg. The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg.2. PROJECT_LOCATION.1 version of the document). Before running the upgrade utility. panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema.

pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database).EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. 632 . panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table.

By default.EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. It identifies those files you can modify.1 version of the document). The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. 633 .

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line.. The following files exist under the . The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation. EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory. The product may reside on any file system.\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 .

The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation. problems. — dba_shell. — . etc. eenuc — readme. and then invokes the EE environment. 635 .txt– copyright notice file. comments. and EE Raceway.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. EE Nucleus. INFORMIX. — create_db – create database process. — EEnotice.txt – File containing release notices. — remove. — license.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes. bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process.\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. The files are grouped by directory. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process.

— mscrecol.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process.exe – environment process. — eeprj.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — dba* files – DB Access files.cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg. doc – directory that contains documentation. share sym – contains EE symbol files. — print. — Eemgr. — menu_shel.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — reeprj – remote environment process. — eeqpr.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable.dat – ASCII file for output file management. help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files. — manager. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. 636 .

\eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

etc.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. comments.txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. eerway — readme. 638 . problems. The files are grouped by directory.

— rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations.dat – controls rule check report management.— remove. — load – processor to load the project database. dgn – Contains the seed file directory.dat – controls process management.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. — eden. — rway_schma.dat – controls standard report management. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. Also contains . data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. and clean database processes. unload drawing.dat – controls Eden processes. Sample . available cell libraries. — process.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. and any design files delivered with the product. 639 . — report.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. These files can be modified. — rule_chk.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view. 640 .dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views.

eden – contains the Eden symbol library. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. This may be customized. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — error.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. — alias.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — seed. 641 .msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. — command. This file can be extended. This may be customized. — eden. — msseed.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.— seed – contains the available seed design files.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — prompt.lib – the Eden symbol library file. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.

report – Contains the source (. and logo. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. The software requires this directory. There is an . — rwaypnl.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. tmp – Holds any temporary files. prompting messages. — rway_ref.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables.sym – symbol file for the bar menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. — status. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus.ace)and compiled (. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.msg – message file containing messages for status field.ace and an . — rwaybar.arc file for each report listed below. The source files may be edited by the user.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. 642 .

629 Annotate Model command. 626 modify. 635 EE Raceway. 635 Raceway file structure. 608 modify group. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 605 modify element. 634 Nucleus file structure. 634 EE Nucleus. 624 mirror copy. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 610 Rotate Group command. 602 EERway. 638 element mirror. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 604. 602 Intergrated Commands. 610. 607 setup. 630 Reference PDS Model command. 614 mirror copy. 605 EE Raceway. 606 PDS reference model. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 608 rotate copy. 608 Modify Group commands. 599 utilities. 614 Mirror Group command. 620 schema load reference. 628 palettes bar commands. 604 design. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 606. 630 reference schema load. 629 EE file structure. 612 file structure EE. 616 modify. 602 model commands. 618 Move Group command. 624 model annotate. 601 643 . 607 modify. 620 rotate copy. 618 move. 628 rotate. 638 group mirror. 626 Mirror Element command.Index annotate model. 629 Modify Element commands. 622 Rotate Element command. 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 618 runtime setup.

00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005C.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum October 2004 DPDS3-PB-200005D For PDS version 07. .03.

...........................................646 Using the Integrated Commands ...................................................................................647 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16...............2).................................................................................................................Table of Contents Integrated Commands (replaces 16) ................................................................648 Area Volume Graphics.650 Appendix A Error Messages..........................................652 645 ...............................................

review the PDS clashes in a model. 646 . The following information has been modified: Area Volume Graphics command See the following text for details. not when running standalone EE Raceway. create a window containing a specific element. The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes. and view the area volume graphics for clash and design areas. display information about the reference models attached to the current model. Note: The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Integrated Commands (replaces 16) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 369-370 in the PDS 7. providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. • The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu.1 version of the document).

Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. See the command description for more details. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. and must have an existing clash in the design area. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. 647 . Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Area Volume Graphics – You must turn Construction Graphics on in MicroStation. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection.Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups.

The default value for this toggle is Propagated. click Attach.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 629-630 in the PDS 7. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. then. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. then. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. click Attach. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. See the following text for details. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. The following information has been modified: Added default value for Sparse/Propagated toggle. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16.2 version of the document). Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. 648 . This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach.

Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. 649 .Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Snap. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. Snap. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. Attach – Attaches a reference model.

You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B. Hilite Graphics . Raceway. the following system environment variables must be defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping. Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment. and double-click the desired area name. Add/Revise Graphics – Adds design area volume graphics to the model.Updates areas that are already displayed in the model. Update Graphics .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Area Volume Graphics The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in the model so that you can see their location. Raceway. To add graphics. PE_HVAC. Remove Graphics . and FrameWorks Plus environments. Use this command if the boundaries of the area are changed.Removes the selected area from the model. 650 .Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for easier identification in the model.Highlights the area in the model. and FrameWorks Plus environments: AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference for more information on setting environment variables. double-click the desired discipline. PE_HVAC. For the Drawing Graphics environment. click Add/Revise Graphics. In addition. Equipment. you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. Please refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on changing the volume graphic symbology. Commands Place Diagonal Lines . you can control the symbology of the volume graphics using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project Administrator.

Closes the dialog box and exits the command. Can be used to exit any of the other commands on this dialog box at any stage.Show – Displays all the design areas attached to the model. 651 . Exit .

fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. See the following text for details.1 version of the document). Asid <numeric value>. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. 652 . Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Asid <numeric value>. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Appendix A Error Messages Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 377-414 in the PDS 7. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. • This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. The following information has been modified: Changed color range from 0-127 to 0-255 in Color error message.

raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table.Asid <numeric value>. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid:<numeric value> <string> 653 . Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Asid <numeric value>. straight connected to invalid system! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Change element annotation. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Change element annotation. Asid <numeric value>. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load.

Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. or ". Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. If the problem persists. Cannot Place Cross Section. digits. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Cannot Place Cross Section.". "$". Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. and replace the one-line. when highlighting by sector and word. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. Recovery: None. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. Invalid olt on oneline. Invalid sys on oneline. 654 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. call Intergraph support. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active.

the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command.Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. and replace the one-line. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs.ins is not in the proper location. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Color not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Recovery: None. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. 655 . Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Recovery: Key in another cell name. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. If the problem persists. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. call Intergraph support. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted.

Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Please export this variable. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. Could not get one line type from user data. 656 . Could not get one line type part table from user data. Recovery: There are various recoveries. based on cause of error. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element.

Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: None. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. Could not write to TCB. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table.Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a oneline. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> 657 . Recovery: None. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file.

so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. 658 . Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Enter correct filename. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. change the spec. If the key does not exist. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. insert it into the reference database. Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. The database is case-dependent. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Recovery: Enter design filename. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters.

Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. 659 . Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions.Recovery: None. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Recovery: Enter a new value. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal.

err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Reason: File pro. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database.err did not close properly. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! 660 . Propagation status may not be recorded. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Recovery: Change access to design file. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Error closing propagation log file. Recovery: Change access to design file.

Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database.Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Error loading one-lines! 661 . Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Correct entry. Reason: Internal error. Error in graphic bang placement. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database.EErc file. Recovery: Add entries to reference database.

Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. 662 . Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. and one element. Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. one datum point.

Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery.sql file. Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP).sql file. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. 663 .Error opening design file <string>. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission.

Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Recovery: Add privilege. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error saving symbology . Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Recovery: Add privileges to database.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. 664 .

Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. 665 . Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: None. Error starting or stopping graphic bang. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Recovery: Fix other errors. Recovery: Key in a value. Recovery: Add privilege to database. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. File <string> exists. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Reason: Internal error. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures.

666 . Possible memory allocation problem.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Modify the radius. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. For example. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. extension or transition of the fitting. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. a form could not be displayed by the software. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. at a cross. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. Reason: An illegal angle exists. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. change the spec. Recovery: Fatal error. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. Try to exit and re-enter the software. Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions.

Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group./config/assign file. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file.Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. 667 . Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH.

Invalid Eden Processor Input. For example. Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. <numeric value>. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. 668 . Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol.

Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Invalid RCP . Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Invalid real number: <string> 669 . Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. If it is a cable entry. Invalid key in . Recovery: Enter an integer value. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP).Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. For example. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. vertex <numeric value>.Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Recovery: Key in another value. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. quantity must be an integer greater than 0.

Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. 670 . Recovery: Enter a valid response. Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Recovery: Fix other problems. Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block.

Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. RC. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. .. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. LB. Recovery: Enter LT. RT. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. CB. 671 . LC. CT. CC. Reason: Invalid text justification entered.or RB in the justification field. Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. LC. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. or RB. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements.. and place the element or RCP. Must be LT. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area.Max run angle = <numeric value>.

No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. C for the cross section type. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. or C in the active specification. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. Recovery: Key in another name. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. B. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. 672 . B.cel). No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file.

No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid special parts exist for this table 673 . Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type.Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command.

Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. 674 . Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Recovery: Select another option. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol.

Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. title block. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. no rows found fitting the given criteria 675 . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Enter schema name. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. three-line. Recovery: None. Select failed. RCP). Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error.Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_".

Recovery: Identify a valid text element. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. Recovery: Enter sheet name. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. 676 . Recovery: Change sheet name. therefore. Recovery: Specify new find criteria. cannot be edited. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Title block placed .unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory.

Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. 677 . Warning Column <string> found in reference. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Recovery: Place a manual fitting.Recovery: None. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. Recovery: Change the title block annotation. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. snap to the angle. Recovery: If necessary. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees.

Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. Recovery: Key in the desired group name. 678 . Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the ./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. you must key in a group name. Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation.

...............................................Index Area Volume Graphics command .........................650 error messages .....646 Area Volume Graphics ..........................650 Reference PDS Model ............................. 650 679 ................................................................. 648 volume graphics displaying ...............652 integrated commands..................................................... 648 Reference PDS Model command.648 PDS reference model ............

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful